Hearing Impaired And Education Research Paper College Application Essay Help

Defining Characteristics of Hearing Impaired The characteristics of hearing impaired can be categorized as behavioral or motor characteristics. The various behavioral characteristics of hearing impaired is a bad attention to what is being said by another person. This condition makes the victim appear as absent minded.

Another characteristic of hearing impaired is the fact that the sufferers communicate by use of gestures instead of responding to persons communicating with them (McCormick, 1995). The sufferer may also turn or node their heads in response to a spoken message.

In some instances these sufferers have underdeveloped speech abilities. However, new discoveries include programmable hearing aids that provide credible assistance for all the affected parties as established within the paper.

Most hearing impaired people usually speak in a monotonous tone and find it difficult to follow the instructions. These sufferers in many instances follow other people and are not very eager to take part in conversations and different types of discussions.

Another outstanding characteristic of these people is that they work best only when in a group as opposed to doing things individually. In addition, the sufferers turn to be actors rather than being the real people that they really are (Drift, Brocaar

[supanova_question]

Differences in Diabetic Related Cases in African-Americans and Whites Proposal essay help online free

Introduction The research study examines the diabetes epidemic among African-Americans based on the various range of risk as well as structural factors contributing to the prevalence of the disease amongst women.

The study mainly emphasizes possible avenues which could be exploited to ensure equal application as well as implementation of the various health care interventions with a focus on disease populations and disease management considering chronic conditions which receive greatest disparities in health care (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

Previous statistics reveal that the prevalence of diabetes amongst African-American is averagely 1.8 times more than that in whites of similar age. The studies further revealed that for every six whites suffering from diabetes, ten African-American are diagnosed with the same.

The mortality rate amongst African-American is also higher approximated to be around 27%. The number of African-American diagnosed with diabetes and at the same time suffering from severe complications which accompanies the disease is over three million, which is almost 13% of the population.

This shows that diabetes is one of the most costly health complications, but it can still be controlled through necessary preventive measures (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

Problem Statement Diabetes is considered epidemic amongst African American women with the rates amongst women 20 years and above recorded to be approximately 12% and 25% amongst women of 55 years and above (Kirk et al., 2007, pp 135-142).

Statistics from the National Women’s Health Information Center, Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) 2002, shows that diabetes is more prevalent amongst African-American women compared to white women. Because of the high rates of mortality and morbidity recorded in diabetes-related cases, there is need for preventive measures amongst African American women population.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Complications brought by diabetes could well be controlled through self-management. However, despite the population knowing the various self-management methods, there have been cases of poor adherence to the various documented means of diabetes care.

These practices range from poor dietary beliefs to poor physical exercises, however, dietary beliefs have been found to be difficult to change owing to economic situation. Research from medical sources reveals that evidence-based practices enhance the quality of care given to patients and health improvement hence lowering medical costs (Burns and Grove, 2007).

Majorly physical exercise and poor diet have been found to be the major causes of diabetes. Change in the level of caloric intake and the various changes in lifestyle influences the prevalence of the disease (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

Research Questions What difference exists in patient-provider services in diabetic-related cases amongst African-American and White patients?

Is the concentration between serum glucose and glycated hemoglobin higher in African-American compared to whites?

Do African-American women understand and utilize diabetes self-management activities?

Literature Review Patient-provider perceptions and the correlation between random serum glucose concentration and glycated hemoglobin are some of the differences in diabetic-related cases in African Americans and Whites.

This research will show the differences between the perceptions of patients and providers on diabetes-related perceptions as well as examine its association if any with self-care behaviors and with particular comparisons between African-American and White patients.

The research will bring to the forefront the part played by ethnic variation in the correlation between random serum glucose concentration and glycated hemoglobin (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

According to Dana et al. 2009, the manner in which a person experiences, understands and identifies diabetes is referred to as diabetes perceptions (Dana et al., 2009, p347). Research on patient-provider differences has found congruence with regard to diabetes-related attitudes, beliefs, and opinions.

We will write a custom Proposal on Differences in Diabetic Related Cases in African-Americans and Whites specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Research also shows that patients and providers generally agree on the core components of effective care of diabetes but have entirely different understandings of diabetes and the priorities for self-management (Burns and Grove, 2007).

There is documented incongruence between patients’ and providers’ perspectives where self-management activities education priorities are concerned, continuity of care, barriers to self-care, treatment goals, quality of patient-physician communication, adherence to self-care regimen and diabetes-related attitudes (Tang et al., 2008, p341).

Kirk et al. 2007 found that both ethnic groups had significantly different perceptions from providers for at least six concepts. For African-Americans, the significant areas of difference from providers were on the ideas of having blood sugar testing, emotions about diabetes, complications arising from diabetes, taking diabetes pills, the availability of help from friends and paying for diabetes.

In contrast, the different perceptions held by White patients were in the concepts of controlling blood sugar, high blood sugar, diabetes diet, exercise, and diabetes, taking diabetes pills, and paying for diabetes. The first hypothesis is that African-American and White patients will differ in their diabetes-related perceptions compared with their care-givers.

African-American patients will have a higher number of patient-provider incongruence than White patients is the second hypothesis (Tang et al., 2008, p342). Aside from differences in perceptions, we will also determine if the relationship between serum glucose concentration and glycated hemoglobin is different between the two ethnic groups in accordance with review by. In individuals with Type 1 and Type 2 diabetes mellitus, glycated hemoglobin is increasingly recognized as an essential measure of recent glycogenic control.

The premise that the relationship between glycated hemoglobin and serum glucose concentration is the same for both African-Americans and Whites has been relied on in epidemiological studies showing significantly worse glycaemic control in African-Americans vs. Whites.

Similarly, this relationship is assumed to be constant by clinical recommendations that target identical glycated hemoglobin values in African-American and white patients (Bleyer et al., 2009, p 128).

According to Bleyer et al. 2009, the correlation between glycated hemoglobin and serum glucose concentration will differ between white and African-American individuals after adjustment for age, gender and level of kidney function will form the third hypothesis of this investigation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Differences in Diabetic Related Cases in African-Americans and Whites by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Glycaemic control has been shown in epidemiological studies to be significantly worse in African-Americans than in whites. The premise that the relationship between glycated and serum glucose concentration is the same for both races has been the basis for these studies.

In the same way, the relationship is assumed to be constant in clinical recommendations that target identical glycated hemoglobin values in African-American and white patients. Data that was almost exclusively obtained from white individuals has been relied on to establish the relationship between glycated hemoglobin and serum glucose in the initial large clinical trials (Bleyer et al., 2009, p128).

Sample Selection and Methodology The study will focus majorly on health beliefs and self-care behaviors on those suffering from diabetes. The comprehensive research will focus on information and explanation from participant’s experiences in the process of managing and treating diabetes. Data collection will be based on cultural construction of health and illness as well as the belief model.

All these would be used as a guide towards data collection and Grounded Theory approach towards analysis of both coded and sorted data. Grounded theory will be used to provide the basis technique necessary for identifying concepts and groups from the interviews. The approach helps in linking concepts into derived and formal theories.

The chosen methodology would assist in providing the avenues used in discovering women’s self-management practices and behaviors, various beliefs on health, support systems, knowledge and education of the chosen sample (Burns and Grove, 2007).

The sample comprised of 68 African American women diagnosed with diabetes mellitus. Constructs related to diabetes self-management will be analyzed as provided by the seven self-management instructors as well as diabetes educational programs. The constructs to be used includes nutrition, physical exercises, changes in weight, stress management, blood glucose monitoring, and education on diabetes (Burns and Grove, 2007).

Qualitative and quantitative methods would be used for the purposes of obtaining data representing health beliefs, knowledge on diabetes as well as self-management behaviors. Questionnaires were prepared for quantitative reasons preceded by qualitative interviews.

Methodology for completing the study The study is designed to reflect descriptive data provided and assist in providing qualitative inquiry into the means through which African American women suffering from diabetes manage their lives. At the same time, the research digs into establishing the perceptions of health practitioners concerned with diabetes self-management.

The research looks into the various variations established between women patients suffering from diabetes, diabetes self-management health practitioners as well as the identified programs. Self-management on diabetes will be based on factors such as; behaviors, various health beliefs and patient education.

The various self-management behaviors monitored included; physical exercises, patient education, monitoring level of glucose, changes in diet, adherence to medication, and interaction with social systems. The rate of epidemic is one of the problems identified for this study, the complications and risks associated with diabetes, particularly amongst African American women (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

Since self-management is at the center of preventive measures on diabetes complication, it was identified as the important aspect of this study. Eight item tool included information such as; number of years providing diabetes self-management education, locality of classes, the number of time classes was conducted, educational level, nature of profession of the specialist, gender as well as ethnicity.

The study being descriptive would utilize the use of questionnaire. The study will illustrate in details the ways in which African American suffering from diabetes manage there lives. The preventive measures discussed would target high-risk groups, which are the African American group.

The research reveals the need for careful control of the blood glucose level and improved care brought by recommended self-management practices. The study will reveal the perceptions and views of health practitioners concerning knowledge and education on self-management.

Describe your variables The study will utilize questionnaires and at the same time, apply efficient procedures in line with ethical methods for data collection. There will be an eleven item demographic showing participant profile, eight items dealing with health educator profile and questionnaire with thirty-nine articles.

Variables in the study include; health beliefs, knowledge of diabetes, nutrition, physical activity, health education classes, monitoring of glucose, support from social dimensions such as families, and finances involves.

Choosing participants for this study will be based on snowball sampling technique. The participants will be reached through word of mouth and also the study depended on the availability of participants in the various self-management education classes. The interview focuses on Africa American women diagnosed with diabetes.

The size of the sample will depend on the homogeneity of the population with respect to research characteristics. All participants will be required to possess characteristics matching the interest of the research study (Kirk et al., 2007, pp 135-142).

The participants were African-American women above the age of fifty-five to eighty years, with clear signs of diabetes and also self-management health educators. This is because according to literature review, diabetes is a common disease amongst middle-aged and those at later stages of life.

Owing to issues on age bracket, the study would establish the points on accessibility and availability of the target population. Participants will be recruited through various means such as; self-management education classes, interviewee referrals, friends of those suffering from the disease, and letters to institutions such as churches.

The other population understudy would be health educators well versed with diabetes self-management, seven in number. To ensure accuracy of the outcome results, two registered nurses, one specialist in nutrition, physiologist, and two physicians are to be included. Informed consent forms would be dispatched and collected form all those participating in the study.

Institutional Review Board/ Proposal Approval The interview includes potentially new contacts who first of all, should be contacted to win their confidence in participation. Participants’ names and personal details would be optional to ensure privacy.

All participants will be required to confirm their participation through phone calls. Referrals will be used for the purposes of snowballing the sample to the required number of subjects.

Results Data analysis provides combination literature review, explanation on various health models, methodology, research questions, and Grounded theory approach on data analysis. Analysis focuses on diabetes health beliefs, self-management behaviors, as well as education knowledge.

Explanatory model of illness ensures that all the information pertaining to individual’s beliefs are obtained. Health Belief Model applied in the analysis to verify the patient’s understanding of the issues of health and diseases. While Grounded theory ensured that all means of identifying categories are linked to the available theoretical perspectives.

The first section of the analysis would reveal both quantitative and qualitative findings, including the various experiences by the researchers. Demographics of the population of women are provided based on the cultural perspective of diabetes amongst women, and the various treatment behaviors focused on health beliefs.

The other section provides the results addressing positive and negative views dealing with diabetes and self-management behaviors amongst the professionals, women and the various programs.

Discussion The study reveals various factors affecting the impact of diabetes in an African-American Woman. The results provided would explore the fact that multiple beliefs and practical behaviors contribute much towards health effects. The determinants are revealed as the secondary factors influencing management capabilities of women.

These include such issues as treatment costs which determine individuals response based on income level. The results would focus on the nature of communication or interaction between patients and healthcare providers as one of the significant barriers since most of the women are un-informed. Compliance to medication and self-management behaviors are crucial in the control and prevention of diabetes and other related diseases.

There’s support of the fact that an individual’s good management abilities, adhering to recommended behaviors and education contributes positively to patient’s self-management of blood glucose level.

Most of the primary behaviors prescribed by health professionals on diabetic management produced positive results on the sample population under study. Various factors affecting self-management were found to be similar across ethnicity, but the types of medication used varied greatly since more women prefer oral medication than injection of insulin.

The study would inform the public on the fact that managing diabetes amongst affected individuals requires more than biomedical approach. The whole issue on self-management requires individuals to be aware of the various societal and personal factors such as gender, education and family, which have direct effects on social life.

The study would provide information necessary for developing and monitoring individual treatment plan. The comparison of the epidemiological relationship between serum glucose concentration and glycated hemoglobin in African-American and white individuals was used in this present investigation.

The correlation between glycated hemoglobin and serum glucose concentration differs between white and African-American individuals after adjustment for age, gender and level of kidney function is the hypothesis for this study (American Diabetes Association, 2009, pp 13-61).

Limitations of this study will include such issues as inaccessibility to private medical records of the participants, which would have revealed blood glucose levels indicating clinical diabetes control measures.

Hence glucose control mechanisms cannot be established through this study. The sample for healthcare educators’ team was too small to represent the entire educators providing devices on diabetes self-management.

References American Diabetes Association. (2009). Standards of medical care in diabetes—2009. Diabetes Care, 32 (1), 13–61.

Bleyer, A. J.,Hire D., Russell, G. B., Xu, J., Divers, J., Shihabi, Z, Bowden, D.W.,

[supanova_question]

Personal Information Use and Identity Theft Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Identity theft is the use of another person’s identifying facts to perpetrate a fraud. According to Saunders and Zucker (1999), some of the economic crimes perpetrated are opening bank account, leasing cars or apartments, applying for bank or departmental store cards and obtaining credit. Reported Fraud increased from 12,000 in 1992 to more than 500,000 in 1999 due to increased use of internet data base (Saunders

[supanova_question]

O’Connor’s Big Point in “Good Country people” Essay essay help

Every story usually has elements of form that help bring out the message that the author has in mind. These elements help shape out the story and if well presented, they effectively contribute to ease of understanding, on the part of the reader. This essay seeks to explain one element of form and its presentation in a story. To this end, focus shall be placed on a story by Flannery O’Connor.

In the story Good Country people, the author, O’Connor, is primarily trying to contrast good and evil. To achieve this aim, O’Connor, weaves the narration around the beliefs and perceptions of the character Joy, who later on changes her name to Hulga.

In this regard, one element of form that principally stands out is prose, which is fundamentally the unspecific but flowing manner in which the story is told. And he develops the theme gradually, as illustrated below. As the story begins Joy, who is crippled, regards herself as the most intelligent individual amongst everybody in her surroundings.

She also takes pride in her wooden leg, which she believes symbolizes her uniqueness. Deeper into the narration, she changes her name to Hulga, she finds herself in an incident where she loses her cherished wooden leg to Manley Pointer, a Bible salesman, who tricks her with seductive moves and eventually makes away with the prized-possession.

It is at this point that she (Hulga) picks knowledge of the evil existing in the world.

Given the number of characters interacting with Joy/Hulga, it calls for the writer to give similar attention to each and every one of them, detailing how, and why they influence the main character’s perception of good and evil. For instance, in telling why she respected Glynese, Mrs.

Hopewell, in her discussion with Mrs. Freeman says that it all boils down to common sense. In narrating this discussion, O’Connor sticks to the Universalist point of view to the first point of view, and from time to time sums up her (author’s) general view of the points made by the two individuals. This strategy is held throughout the entire story.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More O’Connor also uses various other elements of narration including flashbacks, in order to make the reader understand why the characters find themselves at certain positions in life. Flashbacks is basically a form of narration where the author/character reaches back to a past incident and brings it forth to link it with the present.

For example, when Hulga is introduced to Manley, she urges him to talk about himself, and the author picks from his past to describe his current situation. For instance, we get to learn that his mother ensured that he never skipped a day of Sunday School, something that makes the reader understand that his entry into Bible selling did not come by chance.

This essay had set out to explain an element of form and its presentation in a story. The story Good Country People by Flannery O’Connor was used to exemplify the usage of the element of prose/narration.

The discussion came to a conclusion that proper usage of narrative strategies, helped the author bring out the theme she had in mind, in a manner that is easily picked by any reader. By lifting particular examples from the story, and giving their linkage to the chosen element of form, the theme of good vs evil has been well explained.

[supanova_question]

Fosters Group Company Case Study college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction Pure Blonde came into the market in 2004. It was first produced by Fosters Group and it has become the first low-carbohydrate beer which was really successful in Australia. Many companies attempted to produce such kind of bear in the previous years.

For example, Bond Brewery had Swan Gold in the 1980s, but it did not do well in sales and Cooper’s launched Coopers diet beer in the 1960s, but decided to remove it from the market in 1990s due to a declining market share.

After a whirlwind product development process which took 90 days and with a promotional focus on customer discovery instead of aggressive push, Pure Blonde single handedly re-launched the ‘Low-carb beer’ market in Australia.

Foster Group Company is known for manufacturing beer and soft drinks. It was founded in 1888 by two brothers, William and Ralph Foster who owned a refrigerating plant. Two decades later, the Brewing Company decided to form a liaison with other four companies to form Carlton and United Breweries.

Today, this group stands as a sub-branch under the Foster Group umbrella. The Foster Group has become popular in Australia and is famous for brands such as Victoria Bitter, Carlton Drought, Crown Larger and Cascade. Pure Blonde was the first low-carbohydrate beer to be successful in the Australian market in spite of the failure of other companies to market their brands successfully.

In 2004-2005, the dominant players in the beer market were Foster group and Lion Nathan. The popularization of the Aitkins diet and the rising health awareness led to the Australian consumers preferring low carbohydrate products in the 1990’s and early 2000’s. Why did Pure Blonde succeed in this market when so many had failed before? Deeper investigation of the customer base can reveal signposts to its success.

Situational/SWOT analysis Pure Blonde’s success was based purely on the consumers’ preference of the premium beer sector. Premium beer is one segment that was under constant scrutiny. The Premium Peter beer segment seemed to grow at a much faster rate due to favorable economic times, raised standards of living and education, and the delay to have children.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This resulted in the decline of Victoria Bitter. Unfortunately the Premium beer market was quickly becoming crowded and it became increasingly difficult to differentiate between the different brands. This was a major threat to Fosters’ profits.

Fosters immediately identified this problem in the Australian market and came up with a low-carb beer that differentiated its products from the others in the market. This gave it a strength or higher hand over the other products in the market. A good way of exploring opportunities for Fosters was conducting a market research.

It was found that the premium beer was linked to the Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs. Maslow hierarchy of needs dictates that an individual needs to look good and sophisticated. Those who drank Premium Peter needed to communicate that they fit into this profile. Therefore the main drive here was ego. Consumers of Premium Peter needed to show that they were masculine in spite of this gentle side.

However, they also didn’t want to be referred to as metrosexual because to them this translated that they were homosexual. Fosters Group concluded that Premium Peters image didn’t quite match to what being considered as male and masculine according to the Maslow hierarchy of needs. A weakness that they found in their marketing strategy was how to position Pure Blonde to the consumers’ best.

Pure Blonde couldn’t be categorized as being feminine or masculine. More research was required in order to understand where the average consumer placed Pure Blonde and they also had to avoid cannibalizing their lead selling beverage, Crown, market share.

Consumers of Premium Peter needed to consume the beer knowing that it was masculine and still had low-carb content. This clearly had set it apart from Pure Blonde. Fosters managed to make Pure Blonde its premium full strength beer that was low in carbs.

The packaging was of high quality, not to mention the European style bottle and the gold stylish label. Fosters decided to launch the product in 6X350 ml bottle that was sold in clubs and pubs in bottle, giving the consumer an opportunity to discuss the product.

We will write a custom Case Study on Fosters Group Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This allowed those who consumed Premium Peter to discover Pure Blonde and tell their friends about it. This reinforced the masculine perception of the beer. Fosters had regained differentiation of its beers and this saw Pure Blonde being a success in the beer market.

They managed to regained differentiation and, within a year, Pure Blonde had achieved a great success with an estimated 3.3per cent by value of the entire Australian beer market and was reported to be twice the size of its nearest low carbohydrate competitor.

Situational problem The main problem in this case study is the decline in the demand for Pure Blonde and Premium Peter. Currently, the Fosters and Lion Nathan are facing erosion in their market share. This can be due to the fact that Australians have more disposable income and the “premiumisation” of the beer market has led to the consumers demanding higher quality products.

The two companies have experienced a drop in sales for the past ten years with demand shifting from ready to drink spirits to foreign beer products. In addition, a blend in product innovation and packaging, specifically the four bottle packs, could be another cause.

The government could have also played a key role in the decline of local beer consumption when it announced in 2010 the introduction of an alcoholic volumetric measuring system to implement changes in the taxation of alcoholic beverages. This resulted in a 5% rise in beer prices.

The market share is set to face continual erosion in the future because of intensifying competition from other competitors that flood the market with their products. Entrants such as Coopers are set to re-enter the market with low-carb beer brands and Coca-Cola Amatil which recently acquired the Blue Tongue Beer brand.

Traditional retailers also present another problem to the beer market as they decide to promote their own brand low-carb beer instead of Pure Blonde, thus making them direct competitors. For instance, Coles has taken up advertising of its own Maxx Blonde beers over Pure Blonde by directly comparing the two products.

Currently, there are more competitors in the market who have flooded it with their own low-carb beers making it difficult for the average consumer to differentiate between the various brands. As a result, there has been a decreased loyalty between brands.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fosters Group Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Pure Blonde has suffered greatly because of this competition and has not been able to combat Fosters’ current decline in Victoria Bitter sales. Major assumptions that may help explain the current Pure Blonde’s challenges include a shift in competition and changes in tax laws.

A closer look at Premium Peter shows that there has been a continuous growth in its sales. This is evident through a careful analysis of the premium beer segment, which has seen strong growth with total premium beer sales growing by 11.3 per cent in 2009. This might have taken quite a long time to explain the continued decline in Victoria Bitter’s brand which had lost over 3% of its market share since 2005.

Identification and alternatives used by Fosters The premium beer segment has seen significant growth in spite of the declining low-carb beer sales. As the Premium Peter segment grew in numbers, it can be argued that this segment has evolved or even fractured.

Further analysis of the softer segmentation criteria, for example, attitudes and beliefs, understanding of self and self-concept, can help in defining these fractured segments. In order to maintain sales in the market, the key players have developed a strategy of maintaining their consumers by catering to their constantly evolving needs and preferences.

Fosters Group and Lions Nathan have sought to capitalize on the premium beer trend through investing in exclusive licenses to sell imported beers. This is seen by Fosters to obtain the sole license to sell Corona Extra in Australia.

To compensate this, Pure Blonde has expanded its distribution and has begun selling through liquor retailers and service venues including bars, clubs, cafes, and restaurants. They took another step and made the beer available on tap at clubs and pubs.

Pure Blonde sits comfortably in the center of the relatively concentrated premium beer price range, with Maxx Blonde and Platinum Blonde occupying the bottom price ranks and products such as Peroni Leggera sitting at the top.

The product has been effectively promoted and appeared to have held on to its ‘Jack-of-all-trades’ positioning with a focus on the ‘purity’ of the brand.

This positioning is clearly seen through advertisements featuring a 30-something man nurturing a dove back to health along with the tag line ‘from a place much more pure than yours’. Other current promotional materials available carry the message: ‘for men or women, anyone who is weight conscious’.

Recommended course of action This case study suggests that the customers of Foster Group have a distinct set of values such as taste of beer, physical fitness and health in general, and self-image. The managers of Fosters Group should rely on the psychographic elements of segmentation in order to move away from the ‘one- size-fits-all” positioning.

This is why they need to offer several groups of products. In the first case, they should emphasize the taste qualities of their beverages and brand image. In the second case, they should stress the fact that their products contain very low amounts of carbonate, and that such beverages will be more beneficial for the health of customers. In such a way, the company will make a distinct value proposition to various groups of customers.

Discussion Questions How shifting the market would gain Pure Blonde Competitive advantage

The average Australians are health conscious and this in turn makes them prefer low-carb diets. Promoting Pure Blonde as a low-carb beer attracts consumers who are health conscious, unlike premium beer consumers. The Pure Blonde product can capitalized on this understanding by effectively aligning its brand personality to the personalities of the segments, with positive results.

However, women are more conscious of their weight and appearances as compared to their male counterparts who are more concerned about maintaining appearances and fitting in with the boys. Therefore, if the beer is attributed to being more feminine than masculine, then the product may lose its male consumers.

On the other hand, it is traditionally viewed that many women aren’t great beer drinkers as compared to men therefore the product might only decline in sales if it is attributed to being feminine. However, the current woman is more educated and independent, and current trends show that many women embrace lighter beers and other low-carb beers such as Pure Blonde.

Although it would be a difficult task to re-invent Pure Blonde to fit both, the male and female consumers that will definitely be advantageous to the product in the market. The main limitation of this strategy is that many customers felt attached to former brands of Foster Group. I

t may be difficult for low-carbonate beers to win their loyalty. This issue is particularly important for the segment called Premium Peter or male customers who valued premium beer products. They may switch to other premium beers instead of purchasing Pure Blond. This is the risk that the company should not overloo

Customer profile for Pure Blonde

Female

18-35 years of age

White collar job

Single, looking for a partner either short or long term leading to marriage

Prefers to look beautiful and healthy

Is social and likes fitting in with friends

Earns a good salary and has little financial and emotional commitment

Likes to be seen as a bit of a ‘lovable larrikin’ but also likes to be taken seriously in a work environment

Works very hard so as to be successful and plays hard.

Is currently on a diet and identifies that the Atkins diet

Low-carbohydrate diet ‘is a good thing’

Would forego a beer to save the calories- watching her weight

Would choose a beer with a sweet taste

Socializes with friends usually at clubs, pubs etc.

Alcohol consumption is out and about.

The two key aspects that the female consumer is interested in according to the above profile is the taste of the beer and the amount of calories it contains.

Recommendations for the Fosters Group

On the basis of this customer profile and perceptual map, one can recommend the marketing strategies that Forsters Group. The company should make a distinct offering to female customers. While advertising such a product, they need to focus on the idea that Pure Blond products will not lead to the increase of weight, but at the same time they have the excellent taste qualities as other premium beverages.

Their main message should that the company’s beer is low-carbonate, but they should connect this message to such priorities of female buyers as physical appearance and self-image.

Premium Peter The segment called Premium Peter did not completely disappear; it continued to expand even despite the global financial crisis. Male white-collar employees, who place emphasis on style and sophistication, still continue to consume high quality beers when socializing with their friends.

Probably, the lifestyles or attitudes of these people have evolved in a certain way. For instance, they may have changed their attitude toward marriage or health. However, they still play an important role for the producers of premium beers.

Moreover, the main values of these people such sophistication and good appearance did not alter significantly. The existence of this segment will affect the strategies of Pure Blonde. They will have to set stress on the quality of their products when designing packages for their beverages or advertising them.

[supanova_question]

Marketing Strategy: Goals and Objectives Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Our company seeks to become successful in the ice cream business. The company targets to develop a unique set of goals and objectives that will make it a leading player in the market. The company plans to improve the lifestyles of its targeted consumers through training and awareness. This will encourage the consumers to embrace the best health practices.

By so doing, the company will encourage its customers to embrace the best lifestyles. This discussion presents the company’s objectives and goals. The first goal is to provide high-quality products to its customers. There are various aspects used to describe a “high-quality” product. To begin with, the ice creams marketed by the company will provide a new image to the consumers.

The company will achieve this goal using proper promotional strategies. The company will sensitize the customers about the quality of its products thus making its business successful. The quality of any given product plays a significant role towards its success in the market.

The second goal is to change the people’s attitude about ice cream and similar products. It is agreeable that many people in different societies consider ice cream as a bad product because it affects human health. The company targets to use awareness strategies and training procedures in order to change the people’s views about the products. The company’s marketing strategy will be successful after changing the people’s perception about ice cream.

The third goal is to increase the company’s brand equity. Brand equity is what determines the success of a product in the market. Companies with the best brand equities find it easier to succeed after introducing new services or products in a given market. Our company also seeks to change the image of its ice cream trucks and products.

The approach will make it possible for the company to become profitable. This will be a critical approach towards a successful marketing strategy. The other important goal is to re-invent the mobile ice cream industry. Many people today do not understand or embrace the nature of the “mobile” ice cream industry.

That being the case, the company will present new ideas and strategies that will encourage more people to purchase the products. The strategy will make the company’s business successful. The other important objective is to embrace the idea of corporate social responsibility (CSR). Corporate social responsibility is an important practice that helps businesses realize their potentials by providing adequate support to different communities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It will also be necessary to produce healthy products. The company will encourage the people to conserve the environment in order to promote sustainability. The company will also focus on the best ways to produce unique products that are acceptable in the society. This goal will make it easier for our company to diversify its “ice creams” thus becoming successful in the business.

The company will produce new flavors in order to address the changing needs of the customers. The above goals and objectives will help the company focus on its goals and eventually become successful. The ice creams will fulfill the needs of the customers. The other goal is to embrace the best business practices in the industry.

The approach will ensure the business engages in a competitive business. The company will also involve its employees and stakeholders in the decision-making process. Such practices and goals will definitely make the company successful.

[supanova_question]

Low-income African-American Caregivers Critical Essay essay help online

The article in question dwells upon attitudes of African-American caregivers whose children and grandchildren were diagnosed with emotional and behavioral disorders towards school counselors. It is necessary to note that this matter has not received sufficient attention from researchers.

The aim of the research is to reveal attitudes of African-American caregivers with low income whose children/grandchildren have to get mental health counseling. The hypothesis was not explicitly stated but it is clear that the researcher hypnotized that these people have negative experience due to the lack of understanding form the side of school staff that is primarily focused on white middle-class values (even in school where minorities are prevailing).

Six caregivers took part in the study. Tucker (2008) notes that three interviews during several months were held with the participants. It is also added that not all caregivers could attend the final interview. The participants were selected by school counselors of local schools.

Moustakas’ transcendental phenomenological method was utilized. Tucker (2008) analyzed transcripts of the interviews identifying themes. The findings of the study are as follows. The participants were frustrated as they felt they were let alone with their problems.

They also felt that school staff tended to have the so-called ‘my way or highway’. Caregivers also felt that the blame of the behavior was put on them. Only one participant reported that a school counsellor was helpful and gave her all the necessary information concerning mental health services available.

Tucker (2008) argues that this is mainly the result of the white middle-class perspective shared by the vast majority of school staff. The author also notes that counsellor have to be more attentive and find the most appropriate approaches to reach caregivers. The author also notes that the number of participants is one of major limitations of the study.

It is possible to note that the article in question is rather relevant as it can be regarded as a starting point of further research of the matter. The author used relevant research method, as it is necessary to use a qualitative technique to identify people’s attitudes. Nonetheless, the number of participants as well as their geographic location makes the study quite irrelevant.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though the researcher notes that the number of participants may be between five and eight, it is inappropriate to make conclusion based on only three interviews held with six people living in a local neighborhood. The results may also be inaccurate as the interviewer was white and African-American participants could be reluctant to reveal their true emotions and concerns, as they could not trust a white person.

Therefore, there is a chance that the conclusions may be quite inaccurate. However, it is possible to agree with the author’s conclusions even though they need further justification. In conclusion, it is necessary to note that the article contributes greatly to the field of children development. Of course, further research is needed as there are numerous gaps.

It is essential to reach low-income African-American caregivers in different states and different schools. One of the major advantages of the study is that the author provides certain recommendations on the way trust among low-income African-American caregivers and schools staff (especially school counsellors). The article can be very helpful for school counselors and principals as it provides an important perspective on possible improvements of the situation.

Reference List Tucker, C. (2008). Low-income African-American caregivers’ experiences of being referred to mental health services by the school counselor: Implications for best practices. Professional School Counseling, 12(3), 240-252.

[supanova_question]

Leadership and Healthcare Report (Assessment) best college essay help: best college essay help

Leadership is often associated with the business world. However, it has been acknowledged that it is crucial in any field and in any aspect of people’s lives. Healthcare is one of the fields where leadership is essential, as it has a positive impact on patients’ healing process (Laschinger, Wong, Cummings and Grau, 2014).

It is necessary to add that there is sufficient theoretical framework that can enable healthcare professionals to choose the most appropriate leadership style. Slavkin (2010) states that strict and rigid leadership styles are becoming less effective and modern healthcare professionals prefer transformational leadership styles. It is important to stress that contemporary researchers focus on emotional and personal aspects of leadership.

Thus, Laschinger et al. (2014, p. 7) note that resonant leadership is one of the most effective types of workplace empowerment. The researchers define resonant leadership as “a relationally focused leadership style” that includes “visionary, coaching, affiliative, and democratic approaches, whereas dissonant styles include pace setting and commanding” (Laschinger et al., 2014, p. 7).

The researchers stress that resonant leadership styles enable leaders to create the necessary atmosphere in the workplace and decrease the amount of nurse turnover, which is essential in the period of significant shortage in nursing professionals. It is noted that healthcare leaders facilitate lower incivility and greater job satisfaction, which positively affects patients’ wellbeing and quality of services provided.

Laschinger et al. (2014) note that relationships between healthcare leaders and the rest of the staff is of paramount importance for creating the value. Slavkin (2010) also notes that proper interpersonal relationships are crucial for creation of the appropriate atmosphere in the working place. The researcher provides brief insights into development of leadership approaches and states that command and control leadership styles are becoming less effective especially in healthcare setting.

Healthcare field is characterized by high pressure and significant workload. Clearly, additional stress in the form of rigid control and numerous commands forces many healthcare professionals less motivated and productive. This is especially true for nursing professionals who have to communicate with healthcare staff, patients and their relatives.

Many nurses do not handle the pressure and there is a high rate of turnover. The researcher emphasizes that effective leaders have to be more attentive to needs and expectations of the staff. It is also stated that relationally loaded leadership is important for detecting and sharing values. Notably, the researcher pays special attention to the fact that leadership will become more creative, interdisciplinary and will be characterized by “culturally diverse collaborations” (Slavkin, 2010, p. 40).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Hence, it is clear that interpersonal relationships, coaching and creation of rapport is seen as a potential framework for development of the leadership in the future healthcare leadership. Again, the researcher stresses that such type of leadership will make the healthcare staff feel more empowered and motivated to address the needs of patients.

It is also important to remember that healthcare professionals (especially nurses) will also be able to employ some leadership methods when working with patients.

Slavkin (2010) also adds that there are gaps in medical education as future healthcare professionals often lack for knowledge and skills concerning leadership. The researcher stresses that the gaps should be eliminated and medical schools include leadership in their curricula. This will enhance the quality of services provided.

Such relationally loaded leadership styles are associated with emotional intelligence. Delmatoff and Lazarus (2014) state that modern leaders should be emotionally and behaviorally intelligent. The researchers claim that effective leaders should choose the most appropriate styles based on their emotions and behaviors.

Thus, leaders should have emotional and behavioral self-awareness. They should also be able to be socially aware. In other words, they have to understand emotions and behavior, needs and expectations of people they lead. Delmatoff and Lazarus (2014, p. 245) argue that efficient leaders have to understand the value of using “emotionally and behaviorally intelligent style of leadership to ensure that their staff feel empowered and supported”.

The researchers add that the use of this type of leadership will help create the necessary atmosphere of trust and cooperation among the healthcare staff as well as between healthcare professionals and patients, which is crucial for effective treatment. It is also noted that healthcare staff need more training (in schools and in the working place). It can be beneficial to train the staff to make all the employees utilize the most appropriate leadership styles.

Fine, Golden, Hannam and Morra (2009) provide interesting insights into the use of relationally loaded leadership styles. The researchers argue that it is possible to make this style more effective when utilizing Lean approach. Lean methodology was developed in the terrain of industry but it applicable in any sphere of life.

We will write a custom Assessment on Leadership and Healthcare specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Professionals of Toyota developed the methodology, and successful implementation of the approach suggests that it can facilitate development of any industry or organization.

Fine et al. (2009) explain that the Lean approach is based on the idea of elimination of waste from the process of production and/or service delivery. Waste can be defined as any “non-value-added steps” (Fine et al., 2009, p. 26). The researchers argue that healthcare is “an ideal environment in which to reap the benefits of Lean” (Fine et al., 2009, p. 27). The researchers identify principles or steps in the Lean approach.

These are defining value, arranging by value stream, flowing, pulling and seeking perfection. In other words, healthcare leaders should understand what patients expect from them and what they need. Healthcare professionals have to make sure that these needs and expectations are met within minimum time and with maximum efficiency.

Fine et al. (2009) add that this approach is not researched in the field of healthcare and needs special attention. Researchers as well as practitioners should develop appropriate techniques to exploit Lean approach. In conclusion, it is necessary to note that researchers stress that modern healthcare leaders have to pay more attention to emotions and personal relationships.

At that, leaders should be aware of their emotions and behaviors as well as their colleagues’ and patients’ behavior and emotions. This will enable healthcare staff to provide high-quality services as the atmosphere in the working place will be characterized by trust and support. In its turn, this will positively affect patients’ healing process, as they will also be more cooperative and trustful.

Importantly, although there is significant load of research in the field of healthcare leadership, many healthcare professionals lack for the necessary knowledge and skills. Researchers note that the gap should be filled. This can be implemented through inclusion of leadership in medical schools’ curricula. Healthcare staff training will also be beneficial. Healthcare professionals should be aware of recent findings in the field to be able to choose the right leadership style and utilize it correctly.

Reference List Delmatoff, J., Lazarus, I.R. (2014). The most effective leadership style for the new landscape of healthcare. Journal of Healthcare Management, 59(4), 245-249.

Fine, B., Golden, B., Hannam, R.,

[supanova_question]

Management and Strategy Making Coursework essay help site:edu

Management refers to the organization required in resource allocation in order to attain goals. The task is a complex process involving vast risks, opportunities, along with resources that need to be efficient innovations. Mostly, effective management relies on the timeliness and accuracy of information for decision-making; this is because the process requires quality assessment of resources in the determination of value and worth relative to the goals of an organization.

To achieve this objective productively, risks must be minimized through policymaking (Muller, 2011). The issue of concern in management involves strategy-making through information technology and innovation. This is for the reason that leaders must be technologically equipped to face the unending challenges. Leaders ought to gather relevant and qualitative information for planning.

This is one challenge that affects Wal-Mart Company of which information technology department does not keep track of international market needs (Information Systems, 2013). The company did well in information technology and innovations in the past, but currently it is experiencing communication issues with the customers.

This paper analyses the aspect of management and the impact of information technology along with the performance effect. Wal-Mart Company has had ineffective online performance due to lack of proper communication strategy not only internally but as well as externally. The problem with the organization is the lack of sound decisions with regard to stakeholder information, especially concerning the customer needs (Sehgal, 2010).

The information technology department is weak in its strategy formulation and implementation, thereby creating a vacuum amidst stakeholder. As a result, communication breakdowns characterize the company’s management, which makes it difficult to accomplish the set goals.

The management concept revolves on identifying issues that hinder development, analyze the issues, and critically review the options to take a corrective measure. Wal-Mart executive should consider using business experts versed in good information organization in order to resolve the technological issues.

Problems associated with poor information technology management include customer displeasure due to inadequate market research (Information Systems, 2013). Wal-Mart has developed digital platforms to expand its business activities over a large market space; hence, it cannot avoid the inefficiencies that come along.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Providing products over online platforms requires critical decision making since no direct contact exists between a company and the customers; hence, satisfaction at times is far from being achieved. Discerning customer tastes and preferences is central to business success. Therefore, strategies set should collect valuable information from the customers on a timely basis to improve the quality of products.

The problems that come along with poor management styles include ineffective strategy formulation and execution. The inadequacy of information technology innovation affects the supply chain system of organizations, particularly if adequate research is not documented.

Wal-Mart Company could be said to have the best supply chain system, but its technology selections are wrong hence failing the whole innovation strategy. The managers have adopted a failed radio-frequency identification technology, demonstrating the greatest leadership weakness. Matching suppliers’ needs to the customers’ demands are critical for business success (Muller, 2011).

This activity calls for quality skill exercise to take advantage of innovative ideologies linked to organizational objectives. Therefore, a cost-benefit analysis must be done to evaluate the need to install new technology depending on the operational efficiencies guaranteed by a program. The management team should assess resource availability to operate the technology and create business relations with the field experts.

In this case, Wal-Mart lacked enough human resource to implement the new supply chain model advocated hence creating problems. Thus, an ineffective technology management system causes communication problems negating business relations concept (Shane, 2009). However, this can be solved through quality research, stakeholder understanding and control procedures.

References Information Systems: Information Systems Used in Wal-Mart. (2013). Web.

Muller, H. (2011). The transformational CIO: Leadership and innovation strategies for it executives in a rapidly changing world. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Is the Television Series, Friday Night Lights Literary? Explicatory Essay a level english language essay help

The high school football drama, Friday Night Lights, is a great piece of literary work. This is a great television drama, which reflects different literary characteristics, just like other literary works, such as poems, novels, short stories, paintings, plays, and others (Heffernan 1).

While there are non-literary works, they tend to be formal with clear structures and form, precise function, and style. This essay focuses on the use of characters, plot or episodes, and storyline to show that Friday Night Lights is literary.

Friday Night Lights has characters that meet qualities of other characters in works of literature. Characters are people in the narrative or the television series. The television series has round characters, who appear to be complex and experience several development and surprise audience. Characters vary from one episode to the next one.

However, the focus remains on the main character, the Panthers’ football coach Eric Taylor (Berg 1). The director creates a coach who must struggle to balance his roles as a father, his status as a coach for a demand fans, and his own ambitions. Another character is Tami Taylor, the coach’s wife. She becomes a principal at Dillon High School from a counselor.

In addition, Julie Taylor, the teenage daughter of the coach is also a central character in the series. However, it is only Tami and the coach who appear in all episodes of show. Tension sets in the family as Tami gets pregnant and gives birth to another baby. Julie rebels against her parents.

Players are also important characters in the television drama. Football players also change as the plot develops. For instance, Jason Street is the star quarterback who sustains a serious injury that would eventually get him out of the game and make him handicapped. Jason must struggle in order to adjust to his new life. Lyla Garrity also changes from a cheerleader to a youth leader at the church.

The television series depicts characters who struggle and develop to pick up new roles or responsibilities in their lives. Generally, the show depicts various characters of a small town, Dillon who must deal with several challenges in the contemporary American society associated with football. These characters must develop to handle family issues, life lessons, child issues, abortion, alcoholism, football and school funding, and poor economic progress and opportunities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Friday Night Lights has five seasons, which present the plot of the drama. The plot of the drama is engaging to viewers. A plot presents incidents of the drama to viewers. It is the structure of the drama. Every episode in the drama has a ‘whole’ element of a plot i.e., beginning, middle, and end.

The beginning sets the pace for the rest of the drama. For instance, season one focuses on two crucial events, which are the rise of Coach Taylor to the position of the head coach and the injury of Street. These are events, which affect and lead the first season to its end. They show cause-and-effect chain in the drama.

This television series has complete plots to reflect unity of actions. In other words, all episodes structurally self-supporting in which all incidents are bound together through internal action and necessity, which lead to next incidents. However, this television series presents an episodic plot in which episodes succeed one another.

It is the events of the play, which tight the play together because they happen to the same characters, who appear in all episodes of the drama. For instance, in episode one, we have Coach Taylor who will take the team throughout the last episode four. One must recognize that events change in every episode. Nevertheless, they happen to the same coach and other characters who appear in all episodes. This brings element of unity in Friday Night Lights.

Finally, the plot of the television drama reflects elements of a certain magnitude in terms of length, intensity, complexity, and universal significance. Episodes or seasons in this television are not too brief. The director strived to include several themes in organic unity to enhance the richness and artistic value.

For example, in season four, the Coach struggles with undesirable players and dilapidated ground. Vince Howard reflects youth challenges in society and justice while a character like Matt Saracen struggles to find a balance in his life. The episode also reflects grief and loss as Matt struggles to come to terms with the death of his father in Iraq.

This episode also shows how Tim Riggins has developed to a reliable and focused character from a hopeless alcoholic. At the same time, the play has universal significant and meaning to many viewers. Hence, the drama is able to capture and hold emotions of viewers.

We will write a custom Essay on Is the Television Series, Friday Night Lights Literary? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The storyline of Friday Night Lights reflects that the work is literary. The director uses a story arc to present the storyline. A story arc applies in a running storyline with episodic plots. It was common in television series, films, or other comic books. The story director explores story details in several episodes and seasons. It is a common method, which drives drama in a story.

The storyline is able to attract several viewers and develop fans who follow and discuss different episodes. The development of the storyline raises questions among viewers. For instance, in season two, viewers may wonder whether Coach Taylor would ever return to Dillon after taking a new role as an assistant coach TMU. At the end of the episode, viewers will find a solution to their question as the coach goes back to Dillon.

As the storyline develops, viewers also raise questions whether several economic, social, racial, and political challenges that afflict Dillon would end. Viewers also appreciate the importance of football Dillon because it is able to hold the community together. Still, curious viewers would understand how football or sports could highlight social and economic challenges in American societies where football is core.

The essay has used characters, plot, and storyline to illustrate that Friday Night Lights is a television series that meets all qualities of a literary work. The process of writing a literary drama is intense, intricate, intuitive, and intimate and sometimes emotional, yet it requires a balance between all these agents of literary styles. The story uses round characters who develop and change as events in the drama unfold.

Viewers identify with these characters as they confront and struggle to overcome their daily challenges, desires, and anxieties to change and win. The plot, through episodes and seasons, artistically puts events of the story together for viewers while the storyline maintain coherence of all episodes that make Friday Night Lights.

Works Cited Berg, Peter, dir. Friday Night Lights. 2006. Film.

Heffernan, Virginia. Friday Night Lights: On the Field and Off, Losing Isn’t an Option. 3 Dec. 2006. Web.

[supanova_question]

Information Technology Companies Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Special Requirements of Information Technology Firms

Different Managerial Styles

Applicability to Information Technology Firms

Strategic Human Resource Management

Emerging Issues

Conclusion

References

Introduction Information technology is probably the most dynamic sector in any economy. What is new and essential today may not be important the following day. Various new technologies are discovered each and every day. Moreover, due to the dynamic nature of the business environment, requirements of each business entity keep on changing now and again.

As a result, information technology companies are faced by a trick scenario of ensuring that they improve their services as time goes by. If creativity is not part of the vision of an information technology firm, then there is no need of the firm being in business.

Customers need to get the latest technology and a firm that is able to come up with new technologies takes all businesses. Consequently, the managerial strategies used in information technology firm are very crucial.

Special Requirements of Information Technology Firms The dynamic nature of human needs makes the world of technology to change rapidly. In this regard, information technology companies will have to enhance their skills so as to meet the changing needs. Consequently, innovation is crucial for any company that deals with information technology.

To meet this criterion, firms need to find ways of encouraging ingenuity among their employees. For example, though critics argue that Google has been lagging behind in terms of innovation, the fact is that Google comes up with new ideas every so often (Morden, 2007).

Self driving cars, Google glass, Google maps, Android just to name but a few are among the most influential innovations by Google which are as a result of employees being encouraged to be creative (Sutherland 2012). It is also important to note that Google comes up with innovations on issues that affect many people in society.

Moreover, information technology firms should be keen on ensuring that their products can be used on various devices that are commonly used, this include phones and other electronic gadgets. Innovativeness also helps in boosting confidence of consumers thus increasing its market control.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, an information technology firm needs to manifest itself as a market leader in the information technology sector. On the other hand, information technology companies have to invest in other projects that are not among their core business but which are of important value to people. This may include research on alternative sources of energy (Ledel

[supanova_question]

Gate Gourmet Management Report essay help online

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion and Recommendations

List of References

Executive Summary Gate Gourmet is the world’s leading company offering catering services to airline companies. In order to improve the efficiency of its business processes, the firm introduced a Scala system to help in integrating various processes in the supply chain. The firm also introduced e-gatematrix to help improve communication within the new system.

This has helped the firm improve its supply chain and manage the demands of the clients. In order to make this new system effective, the management will need to ensure that its employees are adequately trained on how to use the new system. The firm will also need to help its suppliers upgrade their systems to be in line with its systems.

Introduction Achieving operational success heavily depends on the approach taken in planning and control of inputs. This is clearly demonstrated in the case study about Gate Gourmet. The firm is operating in a highly sensitive industry where changes are unpredictable.

Despite this unpredictability of the market forces, the clients’ demands quality service within the right time and at the right quantity. Sometimes the firm is always forced to change its menu a few hours before the departure of a plane, and this requires an effective processing to ensure that the expectation of the client is met.

Achieving success in such critical circumstances requires effective supply chain management, from the stage of acquisition of raw materials to the time of delivering the finished goods to the customers. It also requires an effective communication system that will enable various stakeholders involved in the production to coordinate their activities very closely. I

n this study, the researcher will be interested in critically analysing how Gate Gourmet manages to meet its tight schedules using the systems and processes in order to provide quality products to its customers at the expected time (Coyle

[supanova_question]

Impact of Technology on Healthcare Services Analytical Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction This is a position paper based on the given topic. It contains the author’s opinion on the impact of technology on healthcare services. The paper also discusses how technology has changed the education and labor requirements for the healthcare sector.

Health care is among the sectors that lack sufficiency pertaining to adoption of technology and its utility. The turbulent healthcare market has been inundated by increased patient demands, declining margins, constant revisions of the current laws and restrictive laws.

The healthcare sector is increasingly viewing IT as a basic asset in the provision of decision support and health related services, as well as managing the increasing costs of health care. Advancement in technology has influenced the manufacture, distribution, and even administration of healthcare equipments and medicine.

The medical world is now full of machines and bioengineered equipments that require a certain degree of technological proficiency to operate. Moreover, technology has also empowered customers to seek and access their healthcare rights and information. Customers can now use current technology to assess the credentials of medical practitioners.

Negligence and errors in medical treatment that were witnessed before the inception of modern technology have reduced. With this hint in mind, there is a need for research on the impact that technological advancement has had on healthcare. Besides, there is a call for further research on how such technological changes have altered healthcare education and labor requirements in the health sector.

The paper therefore provides a framework/plan for a case study final paper on this subject with four chapters each providing a detailed scrutiny of the issue under study. Primary sources such as statistical findings on the subject will be used in the research. Archival documents such as reports, government publications, responses, and reflections on the subject from different stakeholders will also be used.

Technology and the Cost of Health care Technology has enabled healthcare professionals to treat critical diseases but at the same time the cost of such treatments has increased, making it out of reach for most of the patients. The concerned departments do provide subsidy for the costly technology but that too is for a limited period and only for select technologies.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The first chapter will involve a literature search on the impact of technological changes on the cost of health care. Owing to the adoption of new technological methods of treatment, the cost of healthcare has also risen in the past few years. In this chapter, the impact of technology on the healthcare financing will be evaluated using relevant literature, detailing the same.

Medical technology is expensive and hence today the cost of medicine and medical services has risen. Modern technology has also been credited with the current increased level of accuracy in medical treatment. Cannon (2000), in his literary work, provides details of the various ways that technology has aided in the compliance to medication for mental health patients.

Nagykaldi and Mold (2007) evaluated the role of health information technology on the translation of research into practice, and managed to capture some of the limitations, with cost being a major factor. Teich et al. (2000) also duplicated the findings, with their study showing that cost limits the adoption of basic medical technologies. According to Galas and Hood (2009), medical schools and other health institutions also find it expensive to adapt to new technologies.

Growth and development in the health care sector This chapter will highlight some of the important milestones in the health sector in relation to health technology. Cannon and Allen (2000) state its usefulness in the medication compliance. However, with the increased medical technology development, the government has to do higher spending in the health sector (Bardhan

[supanova_question]

Gate Gourmet International Business and Management Report (Assessment) online essay help: online essay help

Executive Summary In this study, the researcher was interested in determining the possible market entry strategies and staffing models for a firm that is planning to go global using real cases of Gate Gourmet and Target Corporation. The researcher used secondary sources to compile a report that would be informative to the firms planning to enter new international markets.

The study reveals that a firm can use indirect exporting, direct exporting, licensing, franchising, joint venture, or direct entry methods. Ethnocentric, polycentric, and geocentric were found to be the three models of staffing that a firm can use in the new market.

Introduction The emerging technologies have transformed the world into a global village. The geographic barriers that limited international trade have been eliminated due to the emergence of new transport and communication technologies. As Aswathappa (2010, p. 51) observes, it is now possible for a London-based firm to have its production plant in India and operate in the global market.

The manager who sits at the head office in London can closely monitor the operations in India and the movement of goods in the global market without having to leave the comfort of his office due to these recent technologies. Many firms are now keen on expanding their strategies beyond their regional borders. According to Green (2011, p. 90), the borderless global market has increased the level of competition in the market.

In the past, many countries had laws that made it difficult for foreign firms to operate locally. This was meant to protect the local firms. However, this is changing as countries start acknowledging the relevance of having a global market free from any barriers. This means that for a firm to remain sustainable, it must find a way of expanding its market share beyond the boundaries of the parent country.

Making an entry into a foreign market is one of the most challenging tasks in the international business and management. Although it is a fact that technology has reduced the world into a global village, it is still a fact that different countries have different socio-cultural and political environments which make them unique. The strategy that a firm uses to enter the German market may not be the most appropriate strategy to enter the Chinese market.

There are fundamental differences between these two markets that will require different approaches in order to achieve success. This may explain why Target Corporation’s entry into the Canadian market was a total failure. According to Dlabay and Scott (2010, p. 89), making an entry into a new market is a very costly affair. A firm will need to put aside a considerable amount of resources for the project. It also involves extensive use of human resources.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Given the sensitive nature of such ventures, a firm cannot afford to fail in its attempt to go global. Such failures will not only affect the financial position of the firm but also the morale of the employees and the trust customers have on the firm. For this reason, a firm must come up with an effective market entry strategy that will assure it of success. The strategy must also include an appropriate human resource management.

The firm should define how it plans to hire its employees from the top management to the junior workers at the new locations. In this study, the researcher will look at different market entry strategies and human resource strategies that a firm can use in its expansion plans in the global market based on the cases of Gate Gourmet and Target.

Research objectives In this study, the researcher seeks to analyse some of the possible international market entry strategies that a firm can use in its expansion plans. The research will also look at the possible human resource strategies that it can use when making entries to different countries. This way, it will be possible to understand why Gate Gourmet has been very successful in its internationalisation strategies, while target’s entry into the Canadian market was a total failure.

Studies of the Strategies Making an entry into new regions poses serious challenges that require adequate understanding of the targeted market in terms of social, economic, and political systems. Taking the case example of Gate Gourmet, the firm finds itself operating in an industry that is not only very competitive, but also very fragile in terms of the products they offer and the highly diversified needs of the customers.

In order to achieve success in such delicate environments, the management should understand some of the possible strategies it can apply in order to achieve market success.

Market Entry Strategies The entry strategy chosen by a firm will always determine how successful it will be in the market based on the local forces. According to Berger (2006, p. 39), a firm should take time and select a strategy that best suits a given market. When selecting the strategy, a firm will need to evaluate its internal strengths and weaknesses, and compare them with the external opportunities and threats in the targeted market.

Based on these factors, a firm will be able to select an appropriate strategy that will need the least cost, but yield high returns. The following are some of the possible market entries that a firm can use to enter various global markets.

We will write a custom Assessment on Gate Gourmet International Business and Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Indirect exporting One of the ways in which firms can make an entry into a new market is through indirect exporting. According to Mitchell (2008, p. 74), this is a low risk and low reward new market entry strategy. In this strategy, a company, say company A, will sell its products to a domestic company, say company B. It is company B that will finally sell the products to a foreign customer that we can refer to as company C.

In this case, company B will be acting as an intermediary between company A and C. This strategy is very common to the upcoming firms and those that have limited financial capacities to make direct entries into a foreign market. According to Ricks (2006, p. 89), one of the main benefits of this strategy is that it requires minimal financial resources.

Company A will only need to ensure that it delivers its products to company B which is a domestic firm. All the logistical costs and any other expenses involved in delivering the products to the foreign market will be met by the intermediary. Another benefit of this strategy is that a firm will not need to be involved in the operational activities of delivering the products to the foreign market.

This means that the firm will not bother about the activities such as hiring new employees to manage the foreign markets, setting up offices in the new markets, and many other operational activities. Unlike direct investment into the foreign market that requires formal registration of a firm in the new market; indirect investment does not involve any paperwork.

This is so because the firm will be delivering its products to a local firm (Zou, Andrus

[supanova_question]

Exit Strategy in Tropical Health Drink Proposal cheap essay help

TCH realises the importance of having a built-in exit strategy for the company’s Tropical Health Drink. This is because of the fact that uncertain business environments may either hinder future commercialisation of the product or make it gain immense market share to a point of wanting to sell the product line to more established businesses (Clarke n.d.).

An explicit exit strategy is also important not only to plan for the future but also to enhance the confidence of potential funders. TCH adopts two exit strategies to cater for the two probable eventualities described above. If the Tropical Health product line starts to make losses due to prevailing market conditions, TCH will consider a friendly buy-out with the view to transferring more ownership to shareholders and employees to keep the product afloat during the turbulent times (Clarke n.d.).

This is a viable exit strategy as TCH will cease substantial ownership of Tropical Health while pumping in more resources from shareholders to maintain the product in the market. TCH will consider selling the product to an established health drinks manufacturer for a fortune if it continues being competitive in the market for a period of 20 years (Yeanoplos 2001).

Reference List Clarke, A. n.d., Exit strategies for small business owners. Web.

Yeanoplos, K. R. 2001, ‘Exit strategy critical for entrepreneurs’, Las Vegas Business Press, vol. 18 no. 35, pp. 9-10.

[supanova_question]

Executive Summary on the Wounded Warriors Project Report (Assessment) a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents What Is Our Business?

Who Is Our Customer?

What Does the Customer Consider Value?

Reference List

What Is Our Business? Wounded Warriors Project is a non-profit organization that is preoccupied with issues wounded American veterans face every day (To honor and empower wounded warriors, 2015). The organization provides a wide range of services to those who sign up. These services include counselling, psychological help, assistance in landing jobs, communication with other alumni and assistance in integration into the community.

Apart from that, the organization provides help with daycare, healthcare services, housing, recreation as well as adaptive sports (Sporner, Cooper

[supanova_question]

Ethical Decision Making Models in Guerrilla Government Analytical Essay college application essay help

This paper gives an account of various ethical issues that are affecting decision-making models by taking the case of the Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) Seattle Regional Office. Ethical challenges emerge when workers face certain dilemmas when determining the proper action to pursue at an individual or organizational level.

In this case, when EPA’s staff members faced ethical dilemmas due to the witnessed compelling forces towards workers’ choice of action, most of them stood firm to support decisions of moral principles. The pressure by the public administrator compelled the staff to adopt guerrilla tactics to ensure responsibility, credibility, and justice. In the EPA’s Seattle Regional Office, the major ethical issue was justice.

For instance, during the tenure of John Spencer as the Regional Offices administrator, Spencer did not consider the staff members’ decision. Therefore, he was inviting conflicts in the decision-making process (O’Leary, 2014). Questioning Spencer’s actions openly amounted to downgrading or relocation. This pressure became intense. As a result, EPA’s staff members sought to respond by engaging in guerrilla welfare.

EPA’s case shows that guerrilla governments arise majorly due to the inevitable tensions between bureaucracy and justice, which if not controlled, result in immense ethical dilemmas that public administrators should learn to avoid. In most cases, guerrilla governments are undetected since they are intertwined with the fabric of daily undertakings.

It can prove difficult for such bureaucracies to engage in constructive measures to navigate from this problem (U.S. Office of Government Ethics, 2000). Social injustice is highly manifested in Spencer’s administration. He influenced the authorities to show loyalty and/or take responsibilities of his decisions while covering his faults by ensuring that those who acted against him faced the consequences.

Political appointees were made to work against their moral principles while at the same time adhering to their superiors’ instructions. Since they lacked relevant decision-making skills, they ended up being susceptible to making dumb decisions that risked their careers (U.S. Office of Government Ethics, 2000).

The pressure to conform to EPA’s bureaucracies, despite the inevitable manifestation of injustice and lack of credibility, forced the career employees to retaliate by applying guerilla tactics. The urge to inform the press about the dire need for integrity and accountability was rising. Staff members were ready for more intense wrangles and organized informal meetings.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This move could give them a well-articulated direction to confront the regional administrator through well-braced guerilla welfare decisively. According to O’Leary (2014), EPA’s staff members believed that they were being used to serve the regional administrator and the political appointees rather than the public. However, initiating guerilla activities could help in resisting what was perceived to be improper activities.

Hence, through staff solidarity, EPA’s staff members could serve the public interest rather than an individual. Guerilla welfare resulted in favorable changes. For instance, Spencer faced several corruption allegations that were backed by the staff members, although he profoundly declined the allegations. However, he resigned as the regional administrator.

Staff members who supported guerilla activities were not ready to take any more responsibilities of faults that were committed by the political appointees. They decided to watch the political appointees as they (the appointees) made lousy decisions that could lead to the questioning of their credibility and appointment.

The failure by the regional staff to cooperate with the regional administrator demonstrated the will by the staff team to stage a more intense guerilla government. The EPA administration had embezzled funds, killed morale at the organization, and used political loyalty to appoint, promote, or fire staff members regarding their political affiliations.

This situation compromised the quality of service delivery to the public while at the same time denying workers their democratic rights to make decisions. In addition, the Civil Service Act was highly violated by the bureaucracies when they ignored the merit system for political patronage and loyalty. In an effort to curb guerilla governments, EPA leaders should be inclusive in decision-making processes.

During her reign as EPA’s administrator, Ernesta Barnes emphasized her commitment to working with everyone to embrace growth (O’Leary, 2014). Barnes was keen to act within the law. She worked closely with EPA’s staff members as a way of embracing the plan of consulting and correcting problems. This move enhanced morale while at the same time, reigniting self-esteem among the staff members.

Barnes enforced tough policies against pollutants. Besides, she ensured the upgrade of sewage treatment without allowing waivers of pollution laws. Unlike Spencer, Barnes ensured equity and justice for all. By dealing with the tolerant and the emerging social injustices, administrators can harness their efforts to make the desired changes to alleviate the possibilities of guerilla governments.

We will write a custom Essay on Ethical Decision Making Models in Guerrilla Government specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Guerilla governments address mismanagement, social injustices, and public interest (U.S. Office of Government Ethics, 2000). For a decent advocate and a successful public administrator, working closely with the staff members through consultation is necessary.

Stubborn and conservative bureaucracies that ignore political neutrality encounter the challenge of managing guerilla employees. Since most government organizations lack the structures to handle the pressure from guerilla activities, it becomes inevitable for these organizations to develop an environment that incorporates and supports dialogue or debate during decision-making processes.

Reference List O’Leary, R. (2014). The Ethics of Dissent: Managing Guerilla Government. Washington, DC: CQ Press.

U.S. Office of Government Ethics. (2000). A brief wrap on government ethics. Web.

[supanova_question]

Ducor Chemical Company Case Study argumentative essay help

This is a case study analysis of Ducor Chemical Company, and it helps in understanding the mechanisms or strategies that can aid in collaborative working relationships among various managers involved in the implementation of a project. This case study is a clear indication of the effects of poor working relations between the project manager and line manager.

The two managers conflict over everything, and subsequently, the line managers often develop a negative perception of the project manager. The aftermath is jeopardy on the implementation of the project, and this could be associated with the termination of the project by a client and great losses to a company.

The case of Ducor Chemical Company is a representation of the diverse nature of project implementation, requiring collaboration and the skills of resolving conflict. The lab manager, in this situation, does not work to enhance partnership and collaboration between the managers involved; hence, tension and anxiety resulting from previous poor working relations are transferred to this project.

In addition, he does not make any effort to notify the senior chemist (Thomton) of the need to mind his language. The poor relationship between the two managers results in poor channels of communication. Hence, even though Thomton’s innovative approach may be beneficial to the company, he takes the wrong approach to make his ideas known.

Thomton’s approach threatens the relationship between Ducor Company and its client. The project manager, on the other hand, has taken the right approach of negotiating with the lab manager for the right person with the right attitude to enable the successful completion of the project. In this case study, the negotiation process is not successful because the lab manager stamps his authority without considering options that may work well for the project manager and the project at large.

How do we create a partnership between the project manager and line managers when project manager focuses only on the best interest of his or her project and the line manager is expected to make impartial company decisions?

Partnerships are developed when a group of two or more people works together for a common cause. According to Kerzner (2013), rivalry between a project manager and line managers results from the perception that they are not on the same level; hence, creating an environment characterized by competition and superior-subordinate relationship.

The project manager may be deemed superior to the line manager, something that may not create a good and positive working relation between the two managers. Developing a healthy relationship between the project and line managers requires both the project and line managers to view themselves as equals and share in authority, accountability and responsibility.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Who should have more of a say during negotiations for resources – the project manager or the line manager?

Morris

[supanova_question]

Documentary Review: Kony 2012 Critical Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

The film Kony 2012 dwells upon the struggle of young people against a man who committed horrible crimes in Uganda. This is also a story about the power of technology and communication that can help people unite and solve really difficult issues.

Jason Russell tells a story about their struggle against Kony, a leader of rebels who kill, rape, torture, kidnap and turn children into their sex slaves or soldiers (Kony 2012, 2012). The target audience of the film is the cohort of young people who want to make a difference.

Of course, the film may appeal to a wide audience of people who care. The documentary’s goal is to make people aware of the horrors that are still taking place in Uganda, the work completed by the organization called TRI and to make people join the community of those who are trying to make this world better for generations to come.

It is necessary to note that Jason Russell starts his story with the impact of technology. Then he tells the viewer about Jacob who is one of many thousands of children deprived of normal childhood. Russell then proceeds with his struggle and the way he inspired young Americans to participate and make the USA help Uganda in the fight against the criminal and his troops.

Russell also shows that the organization he started has provided help by building schools and radio networks to alarm people about coming rebels. The film’s ending is very appealing as the narrator states that each person can help and participate in the movement by making certain steps.

Notably, the characters of the documentary are very different and this creates a very appealing atmosphere. Thus, Russell explains to his adorable son that Kony is the bad guy and the small boy knows that the bad man should be stopped. After that, officials are shown and they are discussing many things.

Once again, Jacob is telling his stories, which are very appealing. During the documentary, groups of activists are shown as well. Each character plays certain role and it is clear that everyone matters. However, it seems that documentary lacks for information about Jacob and especially his present life.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It would be beneficial if the film showed Jacob and his achievements. The viewer would actually see the power of the organization that changes people’s lives for better. The filmmakers provide a mix of interviews, narration, b-rolls and archival footage to tell the story. This mix has a great informative effect and appeals to people.

The narrator provides support to his words by inserting interviews and some b-rolls (such as crowds of young people with banners). The major message is the fight against the wrongs of the society and assistance to those in need. As has been mentioned above, the documentary would benefit from the use of more interviews (more of Jacob’s stories, opinions of politicians).

It is also necessary to add that the filmmakers make use of close-ups (which is a prevailing shot length). When the filmmakers want to reveal the number of people involved (activists or victims), long shots are used. This creates a very good contrast and reveals the idea that one individual can help thousands and vice versa.

In conclusion, it is necessary to note that the documentary is an inspiring film that can make people more active. The film could be improved through adding more stories of success of Ugandan young people who benefited from the changes implemented.

Nonetheless, it still reaches its aim and informs people as well as inspires them to act and participate. Every person should watch the film to understand that the world can become better if more people become more active and compassionate.

Reference List Kony 2012. (2012). Web.

[supanova_question]

Applying Learning Models in a Particular Setting Response Essay custom essay help

There are different ways to achieve the desired behavior in children. Researchers have developed a number of theories and learning models that provide valuable insights into peculiarities of people’s behavior and learning. Each theory can be applicable in many settings but there are also cases when only certain models can be employed, as the rest of them will be inefficient.

In the present case, it is possible to consider the following learning models: generalized imitation and over-imitation, vicarious reinforcement, operant learning model as well as social learning of aggression. It is clear that spanking is the least appropriate method to show the child that stealing is bad. Bandura’s research shows that aggression leads to aggressive behavior in the majority of cases (Hart

[supanova_question]

Coffee Business in Romania Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction Investing in a country’s economy is a step that needs a cautious and critical approach to guarantee a sustainable return on investment. Such a path should not be decided in an ‘instant coffee’ approach as there are many risks involved in making a large investment in a country’s economy, as many factors influence growth of a business.

Any company that wishes to invest in a country must conduct a thorough study of the country’s economic conditions to ensure success of the investment. Romania is one country with blurred economic, social, and political trends, which determine the risks of investing in the country.

Therefore, a clear knowledge of the economic, social, and political environment of the country is important to ensure a steady return on investment.

Assessment of the Current Economic Climate of Romania Macroeconomic and Financial Position

The macroeconomic and financial profile of Romania has deteriorated remarkably, as its access to outside financial sources declined leading to a fall in its exports.

The quick slowing of investment inflows reflects a generalized rise in risk aversion, in part, towards mushrooming markets, simultaneous with influence from the financial disasters in other European economies.

The country had recently experienced a decrease in its international credit ratings by a larger margin than those of other European countries.

This is attributable to increased concerns on the sustainability of the country’s immense current account arrears, the position for wage and financial policies, and the fitness of foreign banks with subsidiaries in Romania.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Market Confidence

The decline in market confidence is responsible for the persistent spells of downward force on rate of exchange, upward force on rates of interests, and considerable falls in equity values. In some instances, the leu can depreciate 25% against the Euro, even with immense increases in local interest rates.

Upward forces on rates of interest indicate interplay of structural and transient factors. Transient factors encompassed augmented segregation of the bank-to-bank market leading to a loss of confidence within the banking industry.

Structural factors, on the other hand, represent the transition of the banking system to net adverse liquidity position, concurrent to the increase in liquidity demand in the context of uncertainty concerning the economic outlook.

The degenerate economic position, in conjunction with pulling out by foreign investors, resulted to a significant fall in capitalization of the stock exchange.

Strengths and Weakness

Romania has some distinct strength. The membership in the EU has improved its economic position. This condition, without doubt, favours its prominent domestic market. Romania has skilled workforce supported on a low wages.

The foreign debt and public sector has maintained at a practical level despite increasing FDI inflows and plenty of reserves of foreign exchange.

On the other hand, the weaknesses of Romania are unique. First, its economy is characterised by deficient discipline with regard to policies concerning fiscal matters and wages. The IMF has criticised this condition.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Coffee Business in Romania specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Second, macroeconomic disparities have been escalating, especially in external accounts. Third, persistent effort on reforms will delay a steady growth, fiscal market confidence, and accession into the EU.

Industry and Market Conditions The current population of Romanian is 21,848,500. This is significantly a sufficient number of people to sustain a steady market for coffee products. The ethnic distribution of the citizens of the country differs by a large margin.

The Romanians, which is the largest ethnicity, represents 88.6 percent of the population. The Hungarians are the second largest ethnic group comprising 6.5 percent of the population. Other many small ethnic groups make up for the remaining proportion 4.9 percent.

These large ethnic groups influence the demand for coffee products. The cultural and religious orientation of these groups determines the rate of consumption of coffee products.

Industry

Romania has advanced telecommunication, aeroscope and weaponry industries. Industry combined with construction sector represents 32 percent of the GDP in the past few years. This ratio is relatively large share without related services. The industry represents 26.4 percent of the labour-force.

Romania is the twelfth major manufacturer of automobiles in Europe. In addition, it boasted of 5.3 percent global market share of machinery. Some prominent companies in Southeast Europe, including Bitedefender, Rompetrol, Petrom, and Automobile Dacia are based in Romania.

Nevertheless, small and medium-sized producing companies constitute a large share of the sector of manufacturing. Two-thirds of the total workforce in Romania works in this sector.

According to business forecasts, different economic activities have a potential for growth. The forecast projected a growth potential of 9 percent for industrial output and 12 percent growth in agricultural output as the table below indicates.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Coffee Business in Romania by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Overall consumption of the final product has a growth potential of 11 percent. In addition, domestic demand has a growth potential of 12.7 percent.

Worth of note, the expansion of the industrial sector is the primary drive for economic growth in Romania. As of 2007, manufacturing industry constituted 35% of the country’s GDP and employed 29 percent of the total workforce.

Majority of the industries are situated in the urban areas of Southeast and Northwest, while mining industries operated in rural areas. Heavy manufacturing industries are situated in South of Romania.

Importantly, Bucharest-based factories accounts for 26 percent of the total manufacturing sector in Romania. These factories employed 12% of the country’s workforce in factories.

Coffee Market Analysis

Coffee is the key beverage in Romania and its performance in the market influence the performance of all other beverages. However, it continues to be customary commodity and consumption is low relative to other members of EU. Lower consumer purchasing power in Romania than in other European country, and the high ratio of populations residing in rural centres and small cities, account for the low consumption of coffee in this country.

The quality of live in Romania deteriorated significantly in 2011 because of endeavours to alleviate the deficit in the national budget, and the development of VAT. These strategies influenced accessible disposable incomes, adversely. Prices in coffee products increased because of decline in the RON and expansion in price of green coffee beans, thereby leading to a decrease in coffee sales in terms of volume.

Competition

In Romania, key major companies dominate the coffee market share of the country. These companies are Kraft Foods Romania SA and Strauss Romania SRL. Other important players retain a relatively lesser market shares. The leadership in coffee dominance shifted in value share and volume of coffee product.

The top two companies led in value share and volume terms respectively. Strauss retained the leading position in volume terms because of a very stable network of distribution and the capacity of the company to satisfy income fragments.

Jacobs brand of Kraft Food led in 2011 in value terms as well as in volumes because of its view as a premium brand, which is affordable, and promotion through established campaigns.

Conclusion Importing coffee into Romania is not a sound decision as the purchasing power of the general population is low to sustain a high return on investments. The low exchange rates of leu against the euro and other prominent currency in the world will make the return on investment decreases.

Because other neighbouring Europeans country consume coffee in larger amounts than Romanians do, it is practical to establish the company in another EU country with a higher consumption of coffee than Romania, and to avoid the high risks associated with unstable economy in the country.

[supanova_question]

Technological Advancement: Intellectual Neutral Element Expository Essay college essay help: college essay help

Introduction Thinking process is a vital element in driving performance in institutions especially in the current environment where change is paramount. The process is driven by diverse factors that hold legal, social, economic and technological implications.

These elements influence individuals thinking process and contribute in the formulation of credible course of action. Indeed, individuals thinking process enable them to identify basic elements in life and potential virtues that hold pertinence in their development.

It also contributes in decision making on various issues that appertain to business operations and political issues. Ideally, thinking process leads to change on policy issues, life ideals and legal provisions. However, not all factors that drive thought process contributes directly to change initiatives.

This paper explores technological advancement as an element that facilitates though process rather than change in institutions

Response to the Question Indeed, technological advancements enhance individuals thinking capacity. This initiates and facilitates change but does not accomplish change initiatives. It lacks legal authority that drives real change in comparison to constitutional provisions that remain in force for a long period.

As noted, it remains an intellectual incentive that provides neutral support that influence thinking capacities of persons (Marcuse 1). It is agreeable that technology enables individuals to identify the kind of change that is appropriate and the achievement process.

However, technological advances lack the legal authority of accomplishing change processes. This explains the reason why it is paramount for an individual to consider technology as an element that facilitate thinking, but not directly engaged in change processes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Change Process in Consideration to Technological Advancement and Political Authority

Marcuse (2) noted that, the thought process in human beings is a vital aspect that defines their course of action. It provides pertinent incentives that facilitate change in diverse facets of operations. This explains why execution of the process should be under absolute diligence and accuracy.

Imperatively, change in any setting, for example, government or private sectors must be preceded with quality thinking. This is vital to facilitate individual’s capacity of acquiring essential knowledge on key issues or reasons that prompt the need for change (Postman 2).

It also equips individuals with innovative skills that hold the capacity to allow the execution of the change process in a systematic manner. Indeed, thinking process that is driven through technology, politics, and social engagement should be based on realistic ideals.

The process should also consider the future expectations of individuals in terms of performance and growth. The process allows individuals to establish and develop a clear understanding on what to change, what to change to, how to cause the change, why change and how to maintain the process (Postman 3). It is not a complete process as it is, but it provides a leading framework for achieving absolute change.

In most jurisdictions, change is eminent in various sectors of operations. However, an effective change process is a guarantee that comes with the development of systematic legal frameworks. The process normally succeeds through structured systems of operations but not mere thinking.

That is the essential elements or varied factors that drive change should have absolute legal authority or backing but not mere fallacy. Any thought on potential issues can be said to be a driver to change process, but not an element that guarantee change (Freud 23). As noted, structural systems facilitate change by providing favorable and consistent change processes with limited complications.

For instance, an institution that seeks to transform its operations by hiring new staff should first develop a structured guideline to that effect. This element should come after the thought process to facilitate change activities. It is also essential in providing a legal framework or stability that is required.

We will write a custom Essay on Technological Advancement: Intellectual Neutral Element specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More According to scholars, politicians are the custodian of change in most settings. They are the people with the obligation to craft and formulate laws that govern operations in most jurisdictions (Freud 49).

This elevates their profile as lawmakers since any decision based on the individual’s thoughts that they adopt becomes law that binds every individual. The laws that seek to regulate fiscal, political, social, and technological activities enforce change ideals in individuals.

The laws are set to provide transformative guideline to streamline operations in diverse sectors in the economy. Secondly, they are to provide a level playing field that guarantees everyone quality operations without complications.

The process is vital since it is set to provide guiding principles that enable stakeholders in any field to operate with comfort ability. It is also to eradicate execution of activities based on individuals thinking capacity (Fromm 2).

This explains why technological system is a driving force for change, but not an element that guarantee change. It only enables individuals to understand the basic areas that are in dire need for change and how the process can be under execution.

Technological Advancement as an Element that Facilitate Thinking Technological change (TC) is a credible term that is synonymous with technological advancement in various settings. It is used to describe the process of innovation and product development in institutions (Fromm 3). Indeed, technology is an integral element in institutions since it enhances individuals thought process.

It equips individuals with new and conventional insights on various issues pertaining to social, economic, behavior and cultural activities. In particular, it achieves the provision of insights on the diverse issues using technological equipments such as TVs, modern smart phones and LCD screens.

That is, it transforms the thinking process of individuals by advancing their knowledge power on diverse issues. These issues include factors that prompt the need for change (Postman 4).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Technological Advancement: Intellectual Neutral Element by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, it only provides essential incentives that influence thinking process, but fails to.guarantee the legal authority that is binding everyone. This is evident since individuals perceptions on various issues that are learnt through technology differ.

This gives them the leeway to make decisions based on their understanding of the presented scenarios. This can lead to contention due to inconsistent operating procedures in the environment that may impede performance (Nietzsche 5).

Therefore, technological change is a process that lacks clear-cut legal backing or authority. This is because its basis is on the current changes and individual’s perception in comparison to constitutional authority.

This is evident since constitutional authority provides a clear framework that is developed under consistency principle. It provides sustainable guidelines that drive operations for long periods.

Conclusion Indeed, technological advancement is an intellectual neutral element that facilitates thinking process. It enables individuals to identify what elements to change and the execution process. Technology provides incentives that instill the need for change in individuals, but does not have clear legal backing or authority.

Therefore, the element is instrumental in facilitating thinking process that drives change. It contributes indirectly in the change process.

Works Cited Freud, Sigmund. Civilization and Its Discontents. London: Penguin, 2004. Print.

Fromm, Erich H. Escape from Freedom. New York: Holt, 1994. Print.

Marcuse, Herbert. One-dimensional Man: Studies in the Ideology of Advanced Industrial Society. Boston: Beacon Press, 1991. Print.

Nietzsche, Friedrich W. Beyond Good and Evil. Sioux Falls, SD: NuVision Publications, 2007. Print.

Postman, Neil. Amusing Ourselves to Death: New York, N.Y. [u.a.: Penguin Books, 2005. Print.

[supanova_question]

Advertising Concept and Campaign Expository Essay college admissions essay help

Advertising agencies are varied from small organizations to large and well established firms that employ hundreds of workers. Hence, it is important to note that the structure of such agencies also range from simple to complex systems depending on the size and activities of the business enterprise.

Advertising agencies have six key departments namely production, media buying, finance and accounts, creative, account planning and account service. For large agencies, departments such as traffic, web development and human resource

[supanova_question]

Julius Caesar an Iconic Roman Essay essay help online: essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

References

Introduction Based on my personal opinion, Julius Caesar was a highly influential Roman, as a leader and as an ordinary person. He is a person who greatly influenced the then Roman people, as well as the recent generations, including Western culture affiliates. He lived between July 100 BC and March 44 BC. Caesar was a statesman, Roman General, and a renowned writer of Latin literature.

He was a major actor in bringing about the gradual revolution of the Roman Republic into the Roman Empire. Among the milestones of his life, in 60 BC, together with Pompey, he formed the political alliance, an establishment created to dominate Roman politics for a number of years.

However, their attempts to converge power through populist movements, were greatly opposed by the conservative elite class within the Roman senate. These included Cato the younger, and Cicero. Caesar’s conquest over Gaul was accomplished by 51 BC, leading to the expansion of Rome’s coverage to the English Channel and the Rhine area.

Caesar recorded the accomplishment of becoming the first Roman Empire, to cross both boundaries, after building a bridge across the Rhine and leading the first invasion into the British territory (Thorne, 2003).

Discussion The accomplishments which Caesar achieved, marked him as an unmatched military leader, who would command massive military power, which led to his eclipsing of Pompey’s standing. The division of power among the two was further threatened by the death of Crassus in 53 BC.

Later, the political realignments taking place in Roman rule led to confrontation between Caesar and Pompey, with Pompey assuming the course of the senate. Through the demands of the senate, Caesar was required to face a trial in Rome, over a number of charges.

Instead, Caesar accompanied by one legion, marched from Gaul to Italy, during which, he crossed the Rubicon in 49 BC. The march sparked a civil war, which left Caesar, the unopposed leader of the Roman Republic.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After taking up leadership over the government, he started widespread reforms of the Roman society and the government system. Further, he centralized the bureaucracy of the Roman Republic, thus was declared a dictator in precedence.

Later on, a number of senators led by Marcus Brutus, ordered the assassination of Caesar in 44 BC, hoping that his death would help revert the system to the constitutional republic government system.

However, the unexpected came about, as a series of civil wars took place, which led to the ultimate permanent establishment of the Roman Empire by Caesar’s adopted heir, Octavius (Augustus Caesar). The larger part of Caesars life was marked by his military engagements (Thorne, 2003).

During his time and after his death, especially among the Romans and his present day admirers, Julius Caesar was well-liked and revered for a number of accomplishments and traits. These include the view that he was a defender of the rights of the people of his time, against the ruling oligarchy.

He is also revered as a highly ambitious person, who was able to push his way into dictatorial power, and bringing about the death of the republic, through his highly developed tactical leadership. Caesar is also revered for his gifted, versatile nature, which saw him amass great success in war, as an orator and a statesman in an effective manner (Thorne, 2003).

Another area that has touched and influenced succeeding generation till the present time, is the literary ability of Caesar. His literary creations are highly revered and used as military references. These include the civil war literature (three books), and commentaries on the Gallic wars, which are documented in seven books.

This literature lives on, and is cited as beautiful and clearly drawn from Latin classic works. In the field of poetry, the only one of Caesar’s works which is traceable to the present, is a poem about Terrence. This piece has also received usage and reverence as a concise Latin piece, depicting the literal constructions of the then Roman society.

We will write a custom Essay on Julius Caesar an Iconic Roman specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In tracing his influence on the Western culture up to date, Caesars death, served to trigger his power and influence, which grew to the level of installing him as a central symbol of western culture and a mythic emblem.

In contributing to the Western culture, the figure of Caesar has been adopted by historical figures like Machiavelli, Shakespeare, Madison Avenue, and George Shaw. For instance, Mussolini and Napoleon have given tribute to Caesar’s crossing of the Rubicon in the protection of the dictatorial course they supported.

Caesar has received credit as a one of a kind political leader. Credit is given to the social, economic, and political changes he caused on the Roman society and government. Caesar’s unique model is given credit and acknowledgement for the ability he showed in breaking the long-standing laws operating within the then Roman society.

This serves to show him as a historical model, who may be emulated by the leaders of today, to bring about the changes that are needed within the history of government systems. Some of the revolutionary changes of Caesar, include his bringing of an entire army into the city, mainly because, prior to his act of disobedience, the army had not set foot inside the city of Rome.

Caesar is seen as a proponent of changes, against the interests of the powerful system, proving the ability of changing socially constructed tolerance for undesired societal systems and structures. Some of the lines or key phrases used or related to his life, are used in real life situations, to explain the directly unrelated events or occurrences.

One phrase which has received such usage to a considerable level is, ‘Crosses the Rubicon,’ which is used as a figurative phrase to show the situation of going beyond the expected conventional levels. For instance, the phrase is used in explaining the cases, where an individual acts way beyond his entitlement, in terms of what he is allowed to do and what not to.

These constructions show that his lines of action, mark milestones in marking real life events, which has held value for many generations after his death (Elton, 1996).

After his death, instead of his legacy dying and things returning to the way they were before he had got into the picture of political leadership, they got even worse, with the possibility of a return to the republic status becoming impossible. Instead, what happened was that civil wars started taking place, which threatened the leadership of the very people who had gotten Caesar assassinated.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Julius Caesar an Iconic Roman by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More After all the civil wars and the deterioration in stability, the leadership fell into the hands of Caesars heir, Mr. Augustus Caesar, and not the rivals. The power of Augustus, further led to the permanent change to the empire status of the region, thus the hopes of reclaiming the republic status (Casson, 1998).

The death of Caesar was more of a motivation to the Romans, and not a loss of their highly esteemed leader. This can be traced to the dramatic entry into power, which had clearly portrayed to the Romans, the ability of working against the common current or established negative principles.

After his death, the Romans were again woken up to the fact that they would expect the leadership imbalances eliminated by Caesar to resurface. As a result, the fear that a power struggle would take place empowered the Romans, which led to the revolt against the leadership change, thus the civil wars witnessed.

This was highly unexpected, as Caesar, a declared dictator, had the support of all the people of Rome, and his death resulted in administrative imbalances. That helped serve the role of showing that he was more of a Roman’s leader, though a dictator. This trait has led to the long held prominence of this icon, thus the influence of Western leadership which comes along with it (Blackburn

[supanova_question]

“Goodbye, Dragon Inn” by Dir. Tsai Ming-liang Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Overview of the Movie

Interesting Parts of the Movie

Relevance to History

Relevance to Society

Mise En Scène

Set Design and Lighting

Space and Costume

Conclusion

Introduction For numerous decades now, the creativity industry has been playing a significant role in shaping the socio-economic status of artisans involved in arts as well as the entire public.

For instance, movies have essentially improved the social and cultural lives of individuals globally, with most of them providing important lessons that viewers can emulate.

China, Japan, and Taiwan in specific have proven important in propelling the acting field by producing several series of movies that have gained global acceptance.

However, despite the increasing interest in acting and watching of movies and films, very little viewers understand the importance of lessons or can rarely identify the crucial aspects within movies.

This aspect can explain the reason behind the sinking interest in several viewers, who are mainly unable to identify the rudimentary themes in different movies. Therefore, this essay seeks to explore the movie, Goodbye, Dragon Inn to establish lessons relevant to history and culture and to evaluate the mise en scène aspect.

Overview of the Movie Goodbye, Dragon Inn is quite a mind-numbing movie for the socially upright.

Tsai Ming-liang, who is one of the most acknowledged and celebrated Taiwanese film directors alongside other famous acquaintances in movie directing like Edward Yang and Hou Hsiao-Hsien developed and directed this chef-d’oeuvre.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The film’s action occurred entirely inside the Fu-Ho Grand, a spacious metropolitan stronghold that directors introduced during its undisturbed days in the film’s preamble. Tsai wrote the movie to commemorate one of the Taiwanese best film directors, King Hu, who passed on in the year 1997.

The movie begins with an introduction of Dragon Inn, one of the 1966 masterpieces produced by Hu, to provide a background into the movie. Tai actually wanted to demonstrate real social issues that are affecting the Taiwanese, Chinese, and Japanese, among other European countries.

Goodbye, Dragon Inn portrays antisocial behaviors including homosexuality, which has been the most religious and politically contested issue in the contemporary times.

Goodbye, Dragon Inn film takes roughly 90 minutes of action, beginning with a humble introduction of the Dragon Inn film that hit the Taiwanese acting scenes way back in late 1960s.

There exists extensive use dialogue techniques applied by Hu in the film Dragon Inn, with a resound of the old movie breaking the silence of a diminishing audience that seems extremely bored. The old and unattractive theatre seems disgusting to film lovers and thus there is hesitance in the lobby.

Before the interested viewers can find their seats for comfort into the theatre, a torrential rain goes down at the entrance of the theatre. The heavy downpour forces the present movie lovers to seek shelter in the cinema hall to evade the harsh weather.

People in the audience noisily crackdown watermelon seeds and start moving around aimlessly. The atmosphere seems strange as male fans creep in the dark revealing how the theatre has become a meeting point for homosexuals.

We will write a custom Essay on “Goodbye, Dragon Inn” by Dir. Tsai Ming-liang specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A female film ticket collector roams around the theatre up and down issuing tickets to the viewers. As the audience commences with their normal film watching activities, a young Japanese boy emerges into the Fu-Hu Cinema house seeking for a homosexual partner in the name of seeking for shelter from the stormy weather.

The young man notices a little audience with men who seemingly appear more interested in each other than the movie itself. Apart from the dirty happenings at the theatre, there are people displaying traits that do not match the social norms expected out of them.

In noticing the presence of men interested in other men, the young man hovers around the cinema hall seeking for attention. Generally, the movie demonstrates homosexuality as its main theme with some Japanese men getting along with this presumably antisocial behavior.

Interesting Parts of the Movie Goodbye, Dragon Inn film has very few interesting parts as the movie entirely presents antisocial behaviors, despite being Tsai’s most obviously sentimental work of his era.

However, the most interesting part in the movie stands out when Tai presents the old Dragon Inn movie into Hu theatre as a way of showing or remarking the end of the most favorite movie by Hu.

Despite being painful and quite antisocial, to think about the traits portrayed by the juveniles in the theatre, especially the young man who arrives in the cinema looking for fellow gays, this part remains very catchy in the movie.

Entering the auditorium, the young man’s mind is not triggered by the events taking place in the film, but he rather focuses his attention to his fellow gays, who seem interested and attracted to each other.

Instead of noticing the presence of his age mates or his elderly grandfather, the boy gets more overwhelmed to spare his time with people above his age.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “Goodbye, Dragon Inn” by Dir. Tsai Ming-liang by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Another interesting part, which makes me wonder why human beings are most attracted and eager to achieve what really does not belong to them, is the ticket collection part. Goodbye Dragon Inn is an epitome of movies with funny characters portraying optimism towards dirty sexual behaviors.

The Fu Ho’s crippled female ticket taker is anxiously eager to express her innermost feelings to a young man (projectionist) whom she has been secretly admiring. She spares part of her supper for the projectionist in a bid to make him aware of what she actually feels about him oblivious of the fact that the man hates her deeply.

Being in fantasies with her self, the young woman moves up and down the booth, which is the position of the projectionist, forgetting her task of dealing with tickets. Dragon Inn ends as the woman slums the door into the theatre from her cubicle only to find that the audience has departed.

Relevance to History Taiwanese people have been associating ghosts with ill or evil things. Historically, dramas concentrated on the character of the dragon to signify evil, thus portraying historical event or biography associated with a real person’s actions.

These series of drama touch on the historical view of Eastern and Western civilization, including mainly Central Asia, East Asia, and India. The use of ghostly figures in the movie communally portrays the ill character of leaders within the historical Asian or even individuals within the society with similar behaviors.

The Taiwanese emerged from historical injustices after going through the era of colonization by the Dutch, the Mainland Chinese, and Spanish with popular dynasties including the Ming and Qing Dynasties demonstrating their political prowess to overcome other colonists in Taiwan.

Dragon horror movies normally link the history with the dark hours that Taiwanese underwent during the colonization period especially during the World War II when Kuomintang (KMT) became the governing policy in Taiwan, and it ended in a great massacre.

Historically, both communities and religious organizations had seriously engaged in antisocial behaviors, including homosexuality, which covers gay and lesbianism.

However, gays and lesbians have consistently insisted that the Taiwanese and the Chinese government should acknowledge homosexuality as a rightful behavior and that government laws should consider this right in their constitutionality.

History behind the rising of homosexuality in Taiwan and China dates back to several years during Zhou dynasty around 500 BCE. The Han dynasty, which served between 260 BCE – 220 CE, adopted this tradition with leaders in the empires practicing this awful act.

The male love pattern persisted throughout the subsequent dynasties with the practice rising to great fame across the world. Currently, the practice is persistent with gays seeking justice through the courts and holding woeful nude processions across Taiwanese major cities and towns.

Taiwan Pride parades in Taipei are the talk of the town and the globe with devoutly Buddhists pushing for gays’ weddings.

Relevance to Society Following the actions demonstrated in the Goodbye, Dragon Inn film, the society has lessons to learn. As explained in the context of homosexuality, this behavior is unacceptable in the society as numerous religions and communities have significantly opposed it.

Skewed towards traditional, religious, and communal acceptable social norms, there has been persistence in disregarding this behavior. The society of nowadays has identified the dangers involved in engaging in risky sexual habits, especially amongst the youth, who have become a challenge to the society.

Gay and lesbian activities have received constant condemnation, since they pose a threat to personal and public health as a spate of sexually transmitted diseases is rapidly increasing at an alarming rate.

A continuum of healthcare activities across the world has been warning individuals on the rising sexual behaviors that are becoming a challenge to the public health. Homosexuality, as portrayed in the film, remains unacceptable behavior in several communities.

Politically, homosexuality is capturing the interest of politicians to engage in public discussions over the despicable act that has continued to rise in the Taiwanese society. This homophobia culture is threatening to delete the social-cultural landscape of the Taiwanese traditions and replace it with the modern culture that has negative virtues.

Tsai’s demonstration of gay manners in the Fu Ho Theatre becomes a strong political matter that triggers politicization of the social misconduct of the communities revealed in the film.

Despite proving significant in portraying the actual situation in some Taiwan community members, especially of the youthful age, the cast triggers societal conflicts that dissatisfy the public image on the film.

With no inspirational actors who at least could neutralize the situation, especially for the youth to emulate, several communities in Taiwan must have disregarded this film. Socially, the film calls for communal and religious leaders to seek possible solutions to help instill acceptable behaviors amongst the youth.

Mise En Scène The stage setting aspect in Goodbye, Dragon Inn is quite relevant in the analysis of this film. The mise en scene film aspect conventionally describes the techniques used in describing the design of a film or movie. Mise en scene actually describes the visual theme, or merely anything, that appears on the screen with its arrangement.

In an attempt to express the theme carried in the movie, mise en scene also portrays significant areas of concern that viewers always find interesting and educative. The aspect also demonstrates how the cinematic technologies have evolved to form films and movies that are more presentable.

In the film, there are several aspects of mise en scene unveiled. In the context of Goodbye, Dragon Inn, this section reviews the major setting features eminent in the movie including the films set design, lighting, space, and costume among other relevant features describable in the film.

Set Design and Lighting Precisely, set design is a feature within the mise en scene film aspect that defines the setting of the scene, especially how the objects appear in the cinema. The set design seeks to elaborate on the aspect of visibility.

The set design eminent in the Goodbye, Dragon Inn film reveals that the movie producer and the director used both set and location shooting that allowed the film to display different images on the screen.

The location shooting is also applicable in the film where the camera concentrates on individual characters, which carry the main theme of the movie. The aspect of the quality of light used in the film is also important.

Normally, the concentration, quality, and direction can significantly influence the value of a film, which further influences the understanding of the audience. Darkness in the Goodbye, Dragon Inn film as used depicts the presence of ghostly images as darkness in normally scary.

Space and Costume These two features in the mise en scene film technique significantly influence the understanding of characters, actions, themes, and moods portrayed in the film by the audience. Space defines the size of the film and it normally affects the viewers’ perceptions and the reading of the film as well.

On the other hand, the features incorporated in the dressing code, which underscores the costumes used in shooting, generally influences the movie viewers.

Taking a deep look into the space captured in the camera, the production consistently concentrates on the corridors and stairs and one wonders the importance of such features. However, the producer ensures that features in the foreground of the movie provide the insight needed to deliver the theme of the film.

The costumes used are significant aspects of mise en scene especially in the movie where the general theme of homosexuality lingers in the minds of the viewers, as inner wears revealed the whole scenario.

Conclusion Movies have continuously portrayed the real character of human nature in the rapidly growing world. Goodbye, Dragon Inn is a boring movie for those who are socially decent as watching the movie reveals nasty antisocial behaviors. Homosexuality, being the current socially and politically contested subject, has been the theme in the film.

The film reveals how people, especially teenagers have forgotten important social norms and adopted westernized culture into Taiwan communities.

This aspect is evident as the contemporary world is facing the challenges of making the youth to understand that homosexuality is unacceptable, with several homos fighting to legalize same-sex marriages across the globe.

In the context of the technique used in the film, mise en scene portrays four distinct features in the film, viz. light, set design, space, and costume, which significantly influence the viewers’ understanding of the actions, themes, mood, and characters used in the film.

[supanova_question]

Comparative Foreign Policy Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

An Overview of the Crisis in Syria

Major Differences Between the US’ and China’s Foreign Policies

US Policy on Syria

China’s Policy on Syria

Conclusions

References

Introduction The armed conflict in Syria is the largest humanitarian crisis facing the world at the moment. Thousands of innocent Syrians have been killed, and there are still no clear plans from the international community on how to end this crisis (Russell, 2012).

However, the disagreement between major powers should be blamed on this failure. For instance, China and the US have differed on almost every proposal aimed at bringing an end to the atrocities in Syria. The foreign policies of the two countries are very different.

China strictly adheres to the principle of non-intervention while the US believes that foreign intervention is necessary when a country is faced with a major humanitarian crisis. For that reason, unless one of the two countries changes its stand on Syria, a quick solution to the crisis will not be found.

This essay compares the United States’ and China’s foreign policies on Syria.

An Overview of the Crisis in Syria Syria is currently in the midst of armed conflict. This conflict is primarily between rebel fighters opposed to President Bashar al Asad rule and forces loyal to him. According to Sharp and Blanchard (2012), various sources claim that around 25,000 Syrians have been killed since the crisis started.

Most members of the internal community believe that the Syrian president will be forced out of power. However, no specific plans or credible timetables on how this will be done are on offer. Syria’s crisis is, therefore, typified by uncertainty and misunderstandings (Russell, 2012).

While the international community is debating on the best ways of intervening in Syria, the conflict is growing. This is a serious threat to the region’s stability. There is a high probability that this conflict may spill over to neighboring countries.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the unrest may create new breeding grounds for Al-Qaeda and other extremist organization. The situation in Syria has a close resemblance to what happened in the Kashmir region. Kashmir harbored key terrorist groups as the unrests provided excellent training sites for them (Hilali, 2004).

Consequently, this conflict diverted attention from the war against terror.

Major Differences Between the US’ and China’s Foreign Policies The United Nations (UN) General Assembly resolution 2131 (XX) declared that all countries should conduct their affairs independently (McWhinney, n.d.). Additionally, the principle of non-intervention prohibits any state from meddling in the internal affairs of another independent state (Adjei, 2005)

Although the UN Charter prohibits the use of force or any military intervention in the internal affairs of a country, it permits the use of substantial force in extreme situations (Kinacioglu, n.d.).

For that reason, the principles of the right to protect (R2P) and unilateral humanitarian intervention are preferred over the principle of non-intervention in most interventions. According to Peters (2009), sovereignty is derived from people and, therefore, their rights, interest, and security should be prioritized.

State sovereignty, therefore, has a legal value only when it respects human rights (Halt, 2012). The United States has used such provisions to involve itself in other countries’ affairs. On the other hand, China has adhered to the principle of non-intervention and its interpretation.

For that reason, China’s and United States’ foreign policies are very different. This explains why there are so many disagreements between these countries on the international front.

We will write a custom Essay on Comparative Foreign Policy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, these disagreements are not healthy since they slow down the process of resolving major humanitarian crises facing the world. For instance, the international community is yet to come up with a plan to end the ongoing civil war in Syria.

US Policy on Syria Since the 1980s, US policy towards Syria has revolved around confrontation, cautious engagement, and containment (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). Therefore, successive US governments have sought to convince Syria to end its support for Hezbollah in Lebanon and extremists within Palestine.

In addition, these governments have encouraged peace talks between Syria and Israel. However, the Obama administration is pursuing other policies. Some of these policies include demand for a political transition, international diplomacy, sanctions, humanitarian aid, and non-lethal aid.

Other policy measures toward Syria include intelligent coordination, disruption of arms shipment to the country and contingency planning. The US, through the leadership of President Obama, has been calling for Asad’s resignation since last year (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012).

Moreover, the Obama administration has also pressured the United Nations Security to condemn the ongoing atrocities in Syria. In addition, US policymakers, in collaboration with the international community, are working on an improved international policy on Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012).

However, the US is yet to provide any clue on whether it will use its military in Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). Therefore, the debate on the United States’ mode of intervention in Syria continues.

Some Congressmen and non-governmental observers feel that the atrocities committed on Syrians people warrants a military intervention (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). They believe that the US should now pursue its goal of regime change.

However, other stakeholders maintain that regime change in Syria will have negative implications on the region’s security (Glaser, 2012). These stakeholders believe that Syrian opposition is infiltrated with extremist elements.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Comparative Foreign Policy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The US is, thus, only enforcing the United Nations-backed sanctions on Syria and supporters of the Asad’s government at the moment.

However, there are other interventions that are not too public. The US has provided Syria with humanitarian assistance since the onset of this crisis. For instance, in August 2012, the US released $82 million to address Syria’s humanitarian needs and those of its neighbors (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012).

In addition, the US has been providing non-lethal aid to the Syrian opposition. Some of these non-lethal aids include medicines and communication equipment (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). Sharp and Blanchard (2012) also add that the US is also arming opposition fighters who are not connected to terrorist groups.

The Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) is obligated to vet opposition groups in Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). Furthermore, the US and its allies, within the region, are also trying to prevent Assad’s forces from receiving additional arms.

For instance, the US administration pressured Iraq to close its air space to cargo flights carrying weapons to Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012).

Some sources claim that the Obama administration is considering a military intervention in Syria (Sanger and Schmitt, 2012). The administration feels that this crisis has reached a point where it requires to be checked. Moreover, the administration is wary of the continued presence of China and Russia in the crisis.

The US military is also secretly developing a contingency plan in readiness for possible interventions in Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). Additionally, although the conflict is continuing, some sources state that the US is preparing for a regime change in Syria.

In this regard, the US is trying to bring the opposition groups together. However, Russell (2012) calls any interventions in Syria hypocritical. He claims that the US is not ready to create a version of the Muslim Brotherhood in Syria.

China’s Policy on Syria Since its enactment, China has at all times obeyed the principle of non-intervention. The leadership of China believes that no countries should interfere with the internal affairs of sovereign states (Swaine, 2012). Beijing only sends envoys to countries facing major humanitarian crises to call for restraint, but never intervenes in any other way.

Therefore, China is opposed to the use of force in restoring sanity in major humanitarian crises (Swaine, 2012). Swaine (2012) also reiterates that China has always been against sanctions and other coercive ways of pressuring an independent state into behaving in a certain way.

China also believes that foreign interventions led by the United States and the West are motivated by a desire to change a regime (Swaine, 2012). China goes on to maintain that beneficiaries of these changes are used by the US and the West against it.

Therefore, Beijing is unlikely to join the international community in major interventions. For that reason, China’s stand on the Syrian crisis is based on principles and values. These values have characterized China throughout its modern history.

This explains why China has stuck with Assad’s regime throughout this conflict. China has resisted western pressure and maintained that Assad should not be dethroned forcefully. However, China has continuously called for a cease in Syria.

However, China is realizing that problems facing failed states or unstable government are serious threats to its security and economy. For that reason, China has shown signs of supporting some interventions (Swaine, 2012). For instance, China failed to use its veto powers to block UN-backed interventions in Libya.

This military intervention was endorsed by the UN Security Country. Surprisingly, instead of opposing this intervention, China opted not to vote on the issue. In addition, China surprised many countries by offering a peace deal to Syria (Hetou, 2012).

However, this deal does not point fingers at any of the sides fighting. China claims that it is not its business to determine which side is to blame for the violence. China has also been able to mobilize support for its peace plan in Syria.

According to Hetou (2012), Russia backs this deal. Therefore, the Syrian crisis is a major test for China’s foreign policy. Nonetheless, in order to act as the main power broker in Syria, China has to forego some of its major stands in foreign relations.

Nonetheless, China has shown consistency in its quest to find peace in Syria. Therefore, China is set to make a major breakthrough as a world leader if it succeeds in bringing peace to Syria.

Conclusions The Syrian crisis is a major test for word’s peace and unity. Interestingly, the US has shown restraint throughout the Crisis. On the other hand, China seems to forego its value and principles in a bid to find peace in Syria. China continued presence in this issue has, however, awakened the US.

It is now believed that the US is contemplating military intervention in Syria. Moreover, sources claim that the US is ready for a regime change in Syria (Sharp and Blanchard, 2012). For that reason, we should be ready for a situation where world major powers will be exercising their rivalry in a major humanitarian crisis.

References Adjei, E. (2005). The legality of humanitarian intervention. Web.

Glaser, J. (2012). Al-qaeda infiltrating Syrian opposition, with US support: Russia slammed the US for ‘justifying terrorism’ in Syria. Web.

Halt B. (2012). The legal character of R2P and the UN Charter. Web.

Hetou, G. (2012). Syria: A litmus test for Chinese foreign policy. Web.

Hilali, A. Z. (2004). Historical developments of the Kashmir problem and Pakistan’s policy after September 11, 2001. Web.

Kinacioglu, M. The principle of non-intervention at the United Nations: the charter framework and the legal debate. Web.

McWhinney, E. Declaration on the inadmissibility of intervention in the domestic affairs of states and the protection of their independence and sovereignty general assembly resolution 2131 (xx) New York, 21 December 1965. Web.

Peters, A. (2009). Humanity as the A and Ω of sovereignty”. The European Journal of International Law, 20(3), 513–544.

Russell, J. S. (2012). Exploring the ‘space between’ that is diplomacy: Syria and US foreign policy. Web.

Sanger, D. E

[supanova_question]

Common Sense and Compassion in the Workplace Replaced by Litigation Argumentative Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Ordinarily, human resource professionals across the world spend most of their time trying to understand how best to handle employee relationships in order to protect both the employer and the employees (EEOC, n.d.).

Considering that there have been numerous incidences at the workplace requiring the intervention of a legal process, I am strongly convinced that common sense and compassion have slowly given way to litigation.

Unlike in the past, where employers and employees dealt with each other through common sense and compassion, the present-day work environment is generally characterized by so much conflict and misunderstandings that have compelled organizations to turn to legal action so as to address workplace problems and protect their public image.

For most organizations, conflicts are created by poor communication and failure to tolerate differences that are often noticeable when people with varying ideologies work together. Other conflicts may stem from the challenges that are often faced by employees when it comes to balancing between work and social life.

This is especially true in organizations where management has not fully embraced the use of technology and consequently, employees are always required to be physically present at their workstations. For many employees, this is very stressful and creates an imbalanced lifestyle.

Unfortunately, this stress spills over to the workplace affecting employees output as well as quality of relationships at work. If not handled well, disagreements between management and other staff may lead to legal action.

Generally, great business relations are initially created between employers and employees through the operations of the human resource department.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In most cases, expectations are very high that individuals who join the organization as staff will do their work diligently guided by common sense and showing compassion to other employees as much as possible.

Over the years, however, the use of common sense and compassion at the workplace fails to prevail and employment laws and regulations begin to take center stage.

As a result, most organizations in the United States, as well as other places in the world, are today forced to get familiar with legal, safety, and regulatory requirements that are related to employee rights and privileges at the workplace. In doing all these, human resource professionals are always seeking to protect their organizations (DOL, n.d.).

To a great extent, legal action is critical in ensuring that the U.S. is able to protect its workers from any form of discrimination or maltreatment.

The various regulatory bodies that exist in the U.S. thus have a common agenda of providing guidelines to be followed by employers in order to safeguard the interests of the U.S. workers and to ensure that no worker is treated unfairly by any employer.

Among others, regulatory organizations concerning themselves with employment issues include the United States Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), the United States Department of Labor, the United States Department of Homeland Security (DHS), and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990.

Generally, EEOC plays a major role in ensuring that laws and regulations meant to protect employees against different forms of discrimination are enforced by human resource professionals (EEOC, n.d.). According to EEOC, it is inappropriate to discriminate employees based on their religious backgrounds.

We will write a custom Essay on Common Sense and Compassion in the Workplace Replaced by Litigation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More All employers in the United States are therefore expected to accommodate employees without paying attention to religious affiliations. To comply with the requirement outlined by EEOC, all human resource professionals must do everything possible to ensure that no single employee in the United States is subjected to discrimination at any level.

It is, therefore, obvious that all individuals tasked with the responsibility of looking into the needs of other employees in organizations must be fully aware of all the laws and regulations in the United States that concern the treatment of workers (EEOC, n.d.).

Above all else, human resource professionals must follow keenly, rules and regulations as set by the government of the United States.

The U.S. Department of Law, on the other hand, provides guidelines to be followed by employers when making decisions regarding wages and working hours, safety and health matters, and employee compensation among others (DOL, n.d.).

The Americans with Disabilities Act effectively requires employers to justify job requirements and criteria for every employee regardless of their physical ability or disability (Perritt, 2003).

For most organizations, once a contract between an employer and an employee is signed, they both have an obligation towards each other.

The onus, therefore, is on the human resource department to ensure that everyone in the organization faithfully follows existing laws and regulations so as to ensure that the organization does not get sucked into lawsuits in the future.

In case of any laxity in implementing rules and regulations as set by the government and other regulatory bodies, an organization may end up with a very unhealthy work environment coupled with costly legal processes that may plunge the organization into huge loses (Perritt, 2003).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Common Sense and Compassion in the Workplace Replaced by Litigation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In view of the arguments presented in this paper, it is quite obvious that common sense and compassion in the work place has been replaced by litigation.

References Department of Labor (DOL). Summary of the Major Laws of the Department of Labor. Web.

Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC). (n.d). Religious Discrimination. Web.

Perritt, H. H. (2003). Americans with Disabilities Act Handbook, Volume 1. New York, NY: Aspen Publishers Online.

[supanova_question]

Conflict Between Palestine and Israel Research Paper essay help

Introduction Since the Israelis and Palestinians believe that they have equal rights to the land that they live in, violence keeps erupting between the two groups. This is because the Palestinians argue that the Israelis chased them from their land while the Jews argue that the land belongs to them based on historical terms (Gunderson 2004, 82).

Various analysts argue that the historical perception involving the breakout of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict is one of the critical factors that have made the conflict to be more severe and uncontrollable. The various historical experiences that the two states have gone through have influenced them to make claims as well as justify their own side on why they should be at war with their neighbor (Matthews 2011, 43).

Though the two states have shown their desire to reach a peaceful resolution, a permanent solution has not been attained. The two states practice different cultures and their official languages also differ. This condition has made it difficult for the two states to reach a peaceful agreement (Fraser 2008, 76).

Many people have written different accounts regarding the causes of the conflict between Israel and Palestine. However, most of the information that has been given out by people especially in the internet have only convinced people about the causes of the conflict rather than giving people the right information regarding the real causes of the war (Matthews 2011, 26).

Since there are very many people who have written different accounts about the exact causes of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict, there are those people who say that it is not possible for a single person to write a summary that details all the causes of the conflict. As a result, the various summaries that have been written regarding the causes of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict are not fully accepted by everyone who reads them.

However, the various factors that have been attributed to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict include; historical encounter between the Jews and Arabs, occupation and settlements, influence of the Palestinian State, the issue of Palestine refugees, Palestinian Terror groups, repression of the Israelis, and the security of Israel (Abunimah 2007, 98).

The goal of this study therefore is to conduct a detailed analysis about the various factors that started the Israeli-Palestinian conflict.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Thesis Statement The conflict between the Israelis and the Palestinians is attributed to the cultural differences that the two societies have with each other. In addition, the two societies fight for the same resources thereby making it difficult for them to come into a peaceful resolution with each other.

The violence in the country has also interfered with the positive relations that Israel and Palestine have with other nations. Any efforts that have been applied to end the conflict between the Israelis and Palestinians have only made the conflict to be more severe (Gelvin 2007, 35).

Description of the Problem The conflict between the Israelis and the Palestinians has been a subject of discussion by many international organizations. This issue has attracted the attention of various superpowers such as the United States. The US is concerned about ending this conflict because it has made the standards of living of the residents in the region to be unpleasant.

Various International Organizations such as the UN believe that there are certain people who are legitimate and who would be willing to do anything so that the violence between the two societies comes to an end (Ross 2005, 78). The conflict between the Israelis and Palestinians is a big problem because it has negatively affected the economic performance of the two states.

No investor would be willing to invest in a region that is politically, socially and economically unstable. In addition, very many people live very desperate lives in their country because of the instability that is present in the region ( Nitzan and Bichler 2002, 102).

The international community is concerned about the welfare of the innocent people in the two states. In order to ensure that the lives of such people are not put at stake, the international community is intervening by facilitating peaceful agreements between the Israelis and the Palestinians.

Purpose Statement The purpose of this study is to analyze the various reasons that led to the conflicts between the Israelis and the Palestinians and the various consequences that the residents of these two states have had to cope with as a result of the conflict.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Conflict Between Palestine and Israel specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It seeks to identify the critical issues that have made it difficult to end the conflict between the two states. It will also provide possible solutions that can help end the conflict that has made the standards of living between the two states to deteriorate.

Research Questions This study seeks to answer the following questions

Is the cultural difference between the Israelis and Palestinians responsible for the conflict that exists between the two states?

Is there any relationship between the conflict and the attitudes of the two states?

What role does the history of Israelis and Palestinians play in worsening the conflict between the two states?

What measures can be implemented in order to facilitate the attainment of peace between the two states?

Are there any measures that can be implemented in order to positively impact on the attitudes of the Israelis and Palestinians?

What role do the terror groups play in promoting violent behavior between the two states?

Theoretical Framework Culture plays a very important role in influencing how nations relate with each other. It serves as a very important variable for determining why clashes between states occur. Different societies clash because of greed for power and to satisfy their own self-interests.

There are those societies which believe that being powerful makes a society to be stable. However recent studies have shown that culture is an important variable in terms of facilitating or retarding peaceful reconciliations between societies.

It has been observed that the only way in which stability between nations can be achieved is when societies understand each other’s’ culture and appreciate it (Milton-Edwards 2009, 34). Culture also has a great influence in politics. The political stand of a particular society is governed by the culture of that society.

It is because of this that different societies have different political stands regarding how they wish their countries to be governed ( Nitzan and Bichler 2002, 106). For example, a Muslim dominated society is not ruled in the same way a Christian dominated society is ruled. This indicates that religion also has a strong role to play in influencing the way a society is governed.

Inter-personal and Inter-group interactions also influence the manner in which a society is governed. If the members of a society do not relate positively, it is difficult to attain stability in such a society.

The inter-group interactions between the Israelis and Palestinians can therefore be said to play an important role in promoting the violence that is prevalent between the two states. In order for a community to be stable, it needs to ensure that the mode of social communication between the members of the society is positive (Gunderson 2004, 67).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Conflict Between Palestine and Israel by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This ensures that the members of the society relate with each other peacefully. A society therefore needs to focus on the quality of its interpersonal communication.

In order for a society to ensure that its members communicate effectively, all the members should be given equal status in order to ensure that they cooperate in all of their daily activities (Caplan 2011, 78).

In a society where people believe that they are superior to the others, it is not possible to reach an agreement thereby making it difficult to achieve peace. Since this is the case between Israelis and Palestinians, it is therefore difficult for the two societies to live peacefully.

Background/ Literature Review The historical issues that that have prevailed between Israel and Palestine have played a major role in aggravating the conflict between the two states. For example, it is said that Judea used to be the home of the Jews initially.

The Romans then inhabited the region and called it Palestine. The Arabs later conquered Palestine and declared it as their home for many years. A movement referred to as the Zionist movement was later introduced by the Jews whose goal was to enable the Jews return to their homeland.

This movement did not put into consideration the large Arab population which had occupied the region at the time. In 1917, the British government required the Arabs to ensure that the Jews who had been chased out of the land found a place to live ( Nitzan and Bichler 2002, 107).

However, the Jews did not take this issue lightly and they were not willing to welcome the Jews into the land. The Arabs therefore engaged in riots with the Jews thereby making the two nations to become enemies.

Because of the severe enmity that emerged as a result of the immigration of the Jews into Palestine, the British decided to stop the immigration process in order to stop the conflict that resulted from the immigration ( Nitzan and Bichler 2002, 108).

However, the conflict between the Jews and the Arabs did not stop and the number of Jews who were killed in the conflict reached approximately 6 million. This made the British government to increase pressure and allow the Jews to migrate into Palestine forcefully.

To end the conflict between the Arabs and the Jews, the United Nations decided to divide the land into Jewish and Arab lands in 1947 ( Kershner 2004, 47). However, this move only made the situation worse leading to a war breakout between the two states.

The Jews emerged victorious and therefore decided to increase the size of their state. This led to the displacement of very many Palestinian refugees. As a result, the Arabs were not willing to reconcile with the Jews at all. This then led to the eruption of wars in 1956, 1967, 1973, and 1982 (Ross 2005, 67).

The Israelis therefore engaged in a series of reprisals thereby worsening the conflict between the two countries. Since these two countries have different believes about their land, it has not been possible to bring the two states together and reconcile them. The two states argue that the origin of the conflict is the fault of the other state. There is no state that agrees to be the cause of the conflict. They blame each other.

The occupation, settlements and land issues have also played a major role in the war between the Palestinians and Israel. The Gaza strip and West bank have been occupied by the Israel people. This region is estimated to be approximately 2,200 square miles.

The Jews are said to have occupied this region during the 6 day war of 1967 when they decided to settle in the region. This region had the capacity of holding approximately 220,000 people. The Jews mostly occupied the West bank region. However, the Palestinians have always demanded that any land which had been conquered in 1967 belongs to them and that the Jews should evacuate the region (Matthews 2011, 78).

However, this was not the case as Israel continued to increase the size of its land. The Jews concentrated on expanding their settlements even during the period when they were engaging in a peace process exercise with the Palestinians in 1993. The peace process continues even today and the Israelis have concentrated their efforts on increasing their settlements even more.

Throughout the peace process exercise, Israel agreed to offer 97 percent of West Bank land and the entire Gaza region to the Arabs (Klein 2007, 23). However, the Palestinians did not accept the offer thereby making the peace process unsuccessful.

The Palestinian state was formed to enable the Arabs reclaim the whole of Palestine. In 1988, the Palestine Liberation Organization indicated that it was willing to accept the solution whereby two states would be formed in order to facilitate the peace process.

However, the Oslo records whose goal was to facilitate the attainment of a peaceful agreement between the two states continued to settle the Jews thereby making violence between the two states erupt again in 2000.

The Palestinians have always demanded for the state of Gaza and West Bank but the Jews have not been willing to let the land off their hands.

The Jews are against the creation of a state in Gaza and West bank because they argue that it will act as a region whereby terror groups will reside (Kershner 2004, 13). Israel has also required that Palestine should be a state which does not have a military in order to limit the control that the state has over its resources and borders.

Palestinians have however received support from the UN and the United States so that they can have their own Palestine State. However, various Palestine extremists do not support the idea of Oslo accords and they are concerned with idea of achieving a fully-fledged Palestinian state.

Because of the different interests between the Arabs and the Jews therefore, it has not been possible for the two states to come into an agreement further making it difficult for the two states to devise an effective mechanism of resolving their conflicts (Gunderson 2004, 24).

During the war that led to the creation of Israel in 1948, approximately 726,000 Palestinians were declared homeless. There were additional Palestinians who were made to free their state in 1967 (Klein 2007, 45).

Today, there are more than 4 million Palestinians who are living as refugees. Most of these refugees live in very poor conditions. They are living in very crowded camps.

These camps are located in West bank, Jordan, Syria, Iraq, Lebanon, and Gaza (Kershner 2004, 35). Most of the Palestinians therefore keep demanding that the refugees should be allowed to return to their homes where they can be provided with proper living standards. The Palestinians are supported by the UN General Assembly Resolution which advocates that the refugee Palestinians should be allowed to return to their home in Israel.

However, the Israelis also argue that an equal number of Israelis went to the Arab lands in order to run away from the war which erupted when Israel was being created.

The Israelis therefore oppose the return of the Palestinian refugees because they claim that this condition would create an influx of Arabs in Israel thereby making Israel an Arab state and remove it from the hands of the Jews.

However, there are certain Palestinian groups which argue that when Israel requires that Israel refugees should also be made to return to Israel, Israel would come to an end because fighting would never end between the Jews and the Arabs.

Most Palestinians do not have the interests on Israel at heart. Most Palestinian groups were formed in order to bring an end to Israel. The Palestinian Liberation Organization (PLO) also announced that Palestinians are mostly concerned about how they can participate in terrorist activities effectively.

The Oslo Declaration of Principles together with PLO therefore signed an agreement in 1993 which said that Israel has a right to exist. As a result, the activities that Palestinians engage in should ensure that they do not interfere with the usual activities of the Israelites.

In order to ensure that the Palestinians agreed to the signed agreement, Israel allowed Palestinian to take control of most parts of Gaza strip and West bank (Said 2001, 98). However, there was a group extremist Palestinians who were not willing to abide to the agreements and they instead started planning on how they would carry out suicide bombings in Israel.

In order for the Israelis to cope with the violence that the Palestinians had initiated, the Israelis started to limit the number of Palestinians who came to work in the Israel. The aim of this process was to prevent the accumulation of terrorist groups into the region. Israel also ensured that there were strict checks at its borders in order to further limit access of terror groups into the region (Dershowitz 2006, 67).

When the border between Israel and Palestine and Israel was closed, the standards of living of the Palestinians started to deteriorate. The workers who were not working in Israel would often be subjected to embarrassing searches. Such people were also made to wait for a very long time at the checkpoints.

Because the Israelis did not want to take any chance at the checkpoints, the Israeli Army and Israeli Defense Force (IDF) used to pen fire on any vehicle that they suspected in order to prevent any incidences of suicide attack (Said 2001, 102). However, this nervousness made the Army and the defense force to open fire even on innocent people.

The strict checks that were imposed on the borders therefore made it very difficult for the Palestinians to secure jobs in Jerusalem. However, after September 2000, the retaliations that Israel imposed to guard itself from the terror attacks by the Palestinians were made be more intense. Israel also went to an extent of assassinating those terrorists who the Palestinians were not willing to arrest.

The Palestinians therefore carried out a series of bombings on March 2002 thereby forcing Israel to launch an operation aimed at occupying most of the regions in the West Bank which were being occupied by the Palestinians. This state of affairs forced Israel to further increase its checkpoints and its periods of curfew.

This activity made it difficult for people to carry out their daily activities such as schooling or going to work. Many ditches were dug to surround towns thereby preventing people from leaving or entering towns (Dershowitz 2006, 78). In addition, houses of the terror groups were demolished and Olive groves were also uprooted in order to try and minimize the bombings.

However, a study by the Israeli Defense Force has shown that the demolitions of the terror group houses did not prevent them from bombing their target areas. As a result, the IDF discontinued the destruction of the houses where suicide bombers used to live.

To further tighten the security measures in the region, many Israelis are harassing the Palestinians by destroying their property and killing them whenever they find themselves in uncertain situations (Abunimah 2007, 78).

Israel is a rather small country and almost all of Israel’s cities are in the range of any Palestinian state thereby making Israel an insecure country. This makes Israel to insist that Palestine should not have any military forces. West Bank is described as very important and any country would be willing to attack Israel to get West bank.

In order for a peaceful coexistence to prevail between Israel and Palestine, Israel insists that Palestine should assure Israel that it would not allow any foreign army to enter its borders so as to ensure that Israel remains secure (Abunimah 2007, 67).

However, since Palestine has not been able to honor its agreements with Israel, various conflicts keep erupting because Israel is committed to protecting its borders and would not allow any foreign state to take advantage of it (Caplan 2011, 56).

Both Israel and Palestine have a right to the eastern part of Jerusalem. Jerusalem is described as a place where one of the holiest temple is found. The Al-Aqsa mosque is regarded as the holiest mosque by the Islam. This mosque therefore joins together the Jewish and Arabs thereby making them inseparable.

The conflicts between Israelis and Palestinians have therefore made some Palestinians and Israelis to vacate the region (Kershner 2004). This condition has further worsened the conflicts between the two groups because each of the groups wants to be associated with the temple.

Analysis The Israeli-Palestine conflict is an issue that has attracted the attention of international organizations and some world superpowers such as the United States. It is also difficult for investors to perform their activities in these countries successfully.

To ensure that the peace process exercise is successful, it is important for the International Community to help bring an end to the internal political stalemate between the two countries ( Ler 2008, 78).

Without the interference from the International Community, it would not be possible for the two states to achieve any progress in their peace process exercise. However, it is not recommended for the two states to engage in any form of negotiations.

This is because these negotiations are said to have a zero percent chance of enabling the two states to reach an agreement that would help bring the conflict to an end (Said 2001, 12).

It is feared that any peace process which is characterized by open-ended consultations would result to fresh conflicts. However, these states should devise a mechanism that would enable them to reach agreements that would facilitate the success of the peace process exercise.

The US has a significant influence on political stalemate that exists between Israel and Palestine. In order to ensure that these states become peaceful, the US can put in measures to ensure that prohibitions between the two states do not exist ( Ler 2008, 33). However, since the violence between the two states has been felt by the international community, the two states should try and exchange territories.

In addition, since Jerusalem is of great importance to the two states, it should be left to act as the capital of the two cities (Ross 2005, 56). The Palestinian refugees who are willing to go back to their home should also be allowed to do so. The various political leaders in the region have also played a major role in fueling the conflicts between the two states.

In this perspective therefore, any leader who does not show interest in facilitating the peace process between the two states should be removed from power. Such a person should be removed from power he was brought into power through the ballot box. Using force to remove the politicians from power could further make it difficult to achieve peace between the two states.

The economic peace of any country has a very critical role to play in encouraging investors to visit a given country. It is therefore important for the two states to focus on the manner in which they can improve their economic performance and forget about the differences that they have.

Most of the Palestinians and Israelis would love peace to prevail in the region (Gunderson 2004, 82). However, they are in a state of uncertainty on whether the other party would be willing to reconcile. This state of uncertainty is brought by the politicians and the Israel and Palestinian extremists who believe that the two states should operate independently and not interfere with the activities of the other state.

It has been noted that majority of the Israelis and Palestinians would agree to the idea that would seem effective in ending the conflict between the two states (Said 2001, 56).

They would even go against the will of their political leaders to ensure that peace prevails between the two states. The only limiting factor in this case is that most of the Israelis and Palestinians do not believe that there is a real partner for peace on the other side.

There is a group of experts which stipulates that countries such as the United States and major International Organizations should employ diplomatic tools which would be effective in enhancing peace between the two states. However, these bodies should take caution because there are certain unplanned events which can occur when the diplomatic tools are used.

The tools used can further aggravate the situation in these two states if they are not implemented in the right manner (Abunimah 2007, 15). The tools might also fail to work because the violence between the two states is characterized by uncertainty. Powerful nations and the international community need to ensure that the intolerable behaviors of the Israelis and Palestinians are put to an end.

The legitimate Palestinians and Israelis should be allowed to live in peace and feel secure (Matthews 2011, 79). The international community therefore needs to provide ample security in Palestine and Israel in order to ensure that usual activities within the region are conducted smoothly.

Conclusion From the analysis therefore, it is true that the conflict between Israel and Palestine is an issue that that has attracted the attention of the international community. These states are said to have engaged in the conflict in order to liberate themselves from the challenges that they were facing.

The conflict is so intense in that the United Nations has not been successful in its efforts aimed at ending the conflict. Instead, the situation keeps getting worse between the two states (Matthews 2011, 78). The conflict has made the living conditions of the residents in the area to be intolerable.

The hopes of reaching a peaceful resolution between the two states are fading slowly because the two states are ever suspicious of each other. Since it is true that peace talks would not be effective in ending the conflict between the two states, the International Community should come in and help reduce the conflict between the two societies (Ler 2008, 25).

It can do this by addressing the negative attitudes that the two groups have towards each other. It should also deploy security personnel in the two states whose goal would be to protect the interests of the legitimate people in the region.

Bibliography Abunimah, Ali. 2007. One Country: A Bold Proposal to End the Israeli-Palestinian Impasse. New York: Henry Holt and Company.

Caplan, Neil. 2011. The Israel-Palestine Conflict: Contested Histories. New York: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Improving the Creativity of Organizational Work Groups Essay essay help free: essay help free

In this article, Leigh Thompson discusses the ways of improving creativity of organizational workgroups. In particular, the author examines various barriers preventing teams from developing original ideas such as conformism or lack of motivation.

Furthermore, the writer offers recommendations that can help managers create an environment that fosters creativity.

This article should be considered by business administrators who must encourage divergent thinking in their organizations. Overall, the recommendations provided by Leigh Thompson are relevant to various organizations.

One of the arguments that Leigh Thompson makes is that creative ideas should be considered wild or unrealistic. Such an assumption is not quite justified, because creative environment can help people find innovative and useful solutions.

However, teams and individuals can cope with this task, only in those cases, when they are engaged in divergent, rather than thinking. In other words, they should be able to look at the same problem or question from different viewpoints.

They should consider paradoxes and conflicting ideas. The main problem is that in many cases, individuals, who work in groups, are more likely to think in a conformist way. Moreover, they can be afraid of expressing their own views.

In the article, Leigh Thompson identifies various barriers preventing people from acting creatively within a team. In particular, the author mentions such a phenomenon as social loafing or people’s unwillingness to work in a group in those cases, their individual contribution cannot be identified or measured.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, the writer points out that people tend to conform to the ideas of other team member even when they do not agree with them. Leigh Thompson also speaks about such a phenomenon as downward norm setting.

Very often, employees do not try to demonstrate their skills or abilities when they see that there are other people who underperform during brainstorming sessions. These are the most important issues that should be addressed by executives or managers.

This article gives several important recommendations or lessons that business administrators should consider. They need to diversify their work groups; in other words, these teams should be represented by people who have different educational or professionals backgrounds.

These people can better evaluate the strengths or weaknesses of plans, recommendations, or solutions. These professionals can bring knowledge from various areas of study, and this is another benefit of diversity.

They are more likely to express different and sometimes conflicting viewpoints. Additionally, managers should make sure that opinions and criticism are not suppressed or overlooked during discussion or brainstorming. They can cope with this problem in different ways.

For example, employees should be asked to write their ideas or recommendations on sheets of paper. Later, these sheets should be redistributed to different members of the group. In turn, they should read the recommendations aloud. In this way, business administrators can make sure that participants are not afraid of ridicule or criticism.

They will feel more relaxed when discussing controversial topics, strategies, or plans. Overall, Leigh Thompson argues that anonymity during these discussions can foster the generation of new ideas and this suggestion can be of great value to managers.

We will write a custom Essay on Improving the Creativity of Organizational Work Groups specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Apart from that, the author stresses the necessity to change the line-up of work groups. In his opinion, the teams that are constantly represented by the same people tend to become less creative. The problem is that these individuals can become accustomed to their daily routine, and they can lose their motivation.

Moreover, some of team members can become leaders, and other people can conform to their opinions. In contrast, the presence of a new-comer can prompt them to demonstrate their knowledge, skills, or professional expertise.

In addition to that, Leigh Thompson believes that managers should encourage analogical reasoning among their employees. It should be kept in mind that people usually have background knowledge in order to solve problems; however, they seldom apply this knowledge in practical situations.

This is why business administrators should ask employees to draw between different problems or situations. Overall, it is possible to distinguish several important lessons that can be derived from this article.

In particular, managers should pay attention to such aspects as diversity of teams, employee’s ability to speak freely, their analogical reasoning, and their motivation. By combining different strategies, business administrators can make work groups more creative.

On the whole, this article can be of great use to many people who can work in public or private organizations. These professionals have to make sure that their organization can develop innovative models, solutions, or approaches. The successful performance of many businesses depends on the creative thinking of their employees.

The suggestions provided by Leigh Thompson can be used to promote the divergent thinking within work groups. This article offers tips and real-life examples that should be considered by corporate executives who want their employees to be empowered and motivated.

The writer speaks about the challenges faced by organizations and explains how they can be overcome. This is why it is worth attention.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Improving the Creativity of Organizational Work Groups by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Should Media be Censored by Government for Protecting the Society in Australia Report college essay help: college essay help

The Australian Communications and Media Authority (2012) has the right to control Australian mass media. Speaking about mass media, the Internet, mobile phone content, TV, and radio are considered.

Australia, like many other countries in the world, has faced the problem of the information spread and the problem of the need of the information filtering. The problem of censorship has been discussed for several years and now it seems that the problem has become urgent.

The Australian Communications and Media Authority has the right to create a black-list for the websites which are considered as those which violate human rights. Moreover, the Australian Communications and Media Authority is responsible for plans on TV and radio channels (The Australian Communications and Media Authority 2012).

Having raised the problem of censorship, the Australian Communications and Media Authority has to decide whether to create a specific action for forbidding a group of programs and information leakage or to allow people watch whatever they want.

The problem became urgent when a top-secret blacklist of banned websites has been leaked. The society began to discuss the problem more actively either supporting or rejecting the reaction (Moses 2009).

The first part of the research is going to deal with the censorship in general. This part is going to include the analysis of the academic research and press articles devoted to the issue. Then, WikiLeaks is going to be compared with the porn and other similar sites which carry forbidden information.

The discussion is going to focus on the problem of WikiLeaks and whether the Australian Communications and Media Authority (2012) acts correctly trying to censor some specific Internet sites or it is important to allow people to be able to get the information they need and whether the actions taken for censorship are correct and do not require additional improvement or other actions are to be taken.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It is important to consider the opinion of people in relation to TV censorship and the Internet, whether there is a difference where the information should be censored or not. WikiLeaks is to be allowed for reading as people have the right to know the truth.

Speaking about the information devoted to the war in Afghanistan, for example, people should know what has happened in order to have an opportunity to analyze the actions for drawing appropriate conclusions (Pilger 2010).

Applying to authoritarian theory, I would like to research whether people support state control over the information they are to perceive or they would prefer to apply to the libertarianism or free press theory.

Considering which of the applied theories is better for presentation, I would search for the answers which have been stated in the problem under discussion (Suresh 2003).

The research should be based on the research explained in the academic articles and in newspaper articles where different people express their opinion in relation to the censorship of mass media in Australia. Much research has been conducted in the considered direction.

The Internet interviewing may be helpful in understanding the real state of affairs. The article by Loewenstein (2010) is devoted to the refusal to apply the Internet censorship in society.

Courier (2008) is sure that the main idea of censorship is to control society not to protect it. Therefore, people have an opportunity what information they want to watch and which is not.

We will write a custom Report on Should Media be Censored by Government for Protecting the Society in Australia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Speaking about censorship of porn videos and other information of the similar type, it is considered as the most important one for consideration. However, Castronova (2009) is sure that porn another erotic data online supports communication through virtual reality.

Supporting this idea Rai (2012) wants to deliver the information that censorship is unnecessary is people are explained the basis of responsible watching. People should choose the information they want to consume themselves, however, they are to be responsible about their choice.

The same data is expressed in the articles by Russell and Irvine (2000) and McMasters (1999). They present the facts which help understand that censorship is important in several situations. TV and radio should be affected by censorship, especially during the day time.

Project Censored 2001 (2002) is the article which speaks about several examples how censorship refuses human right to free availability of information. Moreover, people do not have the right to get to know the latest news as according to the government, the information is not for the citizens.

Speaking about the theories under consideration and the literature which has been found, I can say that all the data is focused on two theories, libertarianism or free press ones, either to support or to refuse the right of the government to censor the information.

Nevertheless, much preference is referred to the refusal for a government to restrict human right in information approach. WikiLeaks is to be allowed as people have to know the truth, they are just to be responsible for what they are doing.

Having considered this information, further research should be focused on the ideas how responsible information reach may be achieved and what should be done in order to create differentiated access of the information in accordance with a human age.

Reference List Castronova, E. 2009, ‘Fertility and Virtual Reality’, Washington and Lee Law Review, vol. 66, no. 3, pp. 1085-1126.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Should Media be Censored by Government for Protecting the Society in Australia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Courier, D. 2008, ‘Do media control and censorship protect society?’, Dhaka, Proquest.

Loewenstein, A. 2010, ‘Governments should not censor the internet’, The Sydney Morning Herald. Web.

McMasters, P. K. 1999, ‘Must a civil society be a censored society?’, Human Rights, vol. 26, no. 4, pp. 8-10.

Moses, A. 2009, ‘Leaked Australian blacklist reveals banned sites’, The Sydney Morning Herald. Web.

Pilger, J. 2010, ‘Why WikiLeaks must be protected’, New Statesman. p. 1-2.

‘Project Censored 2001: 10 important stories you couldn’t read in the mainstream media’ 2002, Syracuse New Times, p. 12.

Rai, J. 2012, ‘A social media: Freedom on the Net comes with responsibilities and reasonable restrictions’, Business Today.

Russell, J. S.

[supanova_question]

Impact of Internal Factors on Strategic Planning Explicatory Essay essay help site:edu

The pre planning stage is the first step towards developing a strategic profile. During this phase an organization is gathering information from its main stakeholders. Information obtained during this phase entails overview of the company history, past sales figures and what products and services are viewed in the market.

From this information an organization can then compose its vision, mission and values. These are key components of a strategic profile that can be used to develop an organization’s goals, objectives or purpose which are vital during the strategic planning process.

After an organization has clearly defined its goals or objectives, the next step involves carrying out an environmental scan which is the process of analyzing the internal and external environment of the organization (Bryson, 2011). This is done by conducting a SWOT analysis.

A good strategic profile can be used by an organization as a filtering mechanism while conducting a SWOT analysis (Herbert, Rowley,

[supanova_question]

Customer Relationship Management Systems Problem Solution Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

In executing a business strategy, poor data quality results from two main sources. These include the use of flawed performance indicators and incoherent analysis of business operations and performance metrics.

In many businesses, this problem is exacerbated by shifts into business management systems that synchronise business and computer-based systems. This approach increases the risks posed by poor data quality on business outcomes.

Poor data quality presents challenges that adversely affect the provision of quality customer service. Access to high-quality data is necessary for two main reasons. First, high-quality data facilitates the operation and maintenance of analytical Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems. Second, it improves the quality of customer service.

The success of a CRM system depends on the quality and reliability of customer data. Quality customer data is obtained by resolving key issues outlined below.

What channels are available to businesses for generation of reliable and high-quality customer information that is easy to apply?

How can various customer experiences be synchronized in enterprises that use multiple channels?

How can businesses develop their analytical systems in order to use customer feedback to improve their efficiency and profitability?

How can customer feedback be integrated into business systems in order to improve customer service?

In-depth analysis is vital in identifying the most effective operational sources that can be used to generate customer data for use in developing better systems. Such analysis involves resolution of several questions.

Which are the most reliable sources of customer data?

In what format is the data stored?

Is the data available in any other form?

Can duplicate data improve the value of the enterprise?

Which data pool is the most consistent?

Businesses use diverse databases. Therefore, it is imperative for system operators to possess special skills and extensive understanding of technology for effective operation of varied database management systems. The most preferred data architecture applied in many enterprises is the model integrated into the CRM suite vendor.

Despite its wide application, the model presents several challenges that affect the efficiency of chosen management systems. The model replaces the existing database with a new one that has a different data model. In addition, it clouds the new system with innumerable data pools.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The model is beneficial because it facilitates the integration of the new system with existing systems for rapid data transfer. Another challenge that comes along with this model is the risk of data duplication.

In many cases, the new system duplicates certain data elements that are contained in the existing system. Data duplication complicates the decision-making process.

In order to make the CRM data architecture the default system in an enterprise, it is necessary to map the applications of a new system into existing databases in order to synchronise their functions. This approach is expensive because it requires many resources.

Therefore, it is mainly applied by large enterprises. An alternative approach is to integrate existing databases with newly developed operational data stores and CRM applications. Companies discover and master their CRM capabilities by finding and executing projects from clients through brainstorming sessions.

These sessions aim to understand customer insights, build data pools, integrate new technologies into business operations, and increase employee performance through training. Identification of projects that align with an enterprise’s CRM capabilities reveals the technical and financial requirements of chosen projects.

After project identification, the company focuses on finding the right people, business processes and technologies to execute the projects. Comprehension of customer profitability is based on the proper integration of products, sales staff, data channels, and customer insights into the management system.

[supanova_question]

Kuwait’s Opposition and the Freedom of Expression Research Paper writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Relevant Theory

Literature Review

Facts Backgrounding the Case

The Outcome of Issue and Effect of Statute

Conclusion

References

Introduction In many countries around the world, there have been attempts to champion for the freedom of expression. According to Kai (2007), countries in the West have achieved this freedom in accordance with the international standards. However, other countries are still struggling to achieve this freedom.

In Kuwait, opposition leaders have criticized the government for what they term as close control of the public and private press. The state-run media companies are keen on pushing the agenda of the government while the private media are too afraid to act as a watchdog.

Under the old media laws, censorship against media stations seen to criticize the government was very common. However, the new media laws have granted the media more power. Social media has become an integral part of media due to the progress made in the telecommunication sector.

In Kuwait, just like in many other GCC countries, the government still controls the media through various press laws. The recent arrest and subsequent jailing of the opposition leader when he was accused of abusing the Emir is a clear indication that any negative criticism against government officials or religion in this country is not tolerated.

The government of Kuwait, which is made up of the royal family, has been keen on improving the economy of this country.

The political system in the country has played a major role in limiting the freedom of media because the royal family is very keen on thwarting any form of rebellion against the government. This explains why the opposition has become very critical of the rulers and the government officials.

They have been demanding for the freedom of the press, sometimes resorting to violent protest in an attempt to achieve this aim (Wheeler, 2001). Fighting for media freedom is not wrong, but the approach used by the opposition leaders is not right.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Freedom of press does not give anyone the power to abuse the royal family, government officials, or any other person in this country. The opposition leaders must understand that freedom comes with some share of responsibilities. Journalists must embrace positive journalism.

In this paper, the researcher will focus on Kuwait’s opposition and the freedom of media in the country.

Relevant Theory In is important to relate the concept of freedom of expression with a specific theory that can help in its analysis. The researcher considered Liberalism as the most appropriate political theory for this concept. This theory holds that individuals in a society should have autonomy.

People should be allowed to express their political and civil liberties. Governance should be based on written law and the governors should seek the consent of the governed before making important decisions that affect their lives.

Liberalism also emphasizes on the need for the people to be protected from any arbitrary authority that may subject them to suffering (Casey, Thackeray

[supanova_question]

The lived experiences of Native American Indian women parenting off the reservation Dissertation essay help online free

Table of Contents Problem Statement

Purpose and Significance

Problem Background

Theoretical Framework

Research Questions

Nature of the Study

Possible Sources and Types of Data

References

Problem Statement From the information gathered from literature review, it is evident that many studies have been conducted on individuals who live in reservations. Some of these studies have laid particular interest on women.

However, it is crucial to state here that the studies have been limited to studying a specific character trait within the Native American Indian women on reservations. Browker (1992) studied the rate of school dropout among females who live in the Reservations.

He found that the rate of dropout among women from the reservations was high compared to other women in the U. S (Browker, 1992). This phenomenon was attributed to the difference in priority that women reservation and other women within the U.S have.

Consequently, Light and Marrin (1985) conducted a study that focused on the upbringing of children in reservations. This study does not specifically concentrate on the guidance of women but gives an overview of how children are brought up in the reservations.

From the studies that have been covered in this paper, it is evident that minimal research that specifically focuses on the women who want to raise their children outside the reservations been conducted.

It is, however, important to note that women from reservations face very many challenges and limiting the focus to just one aspect will lock out other probably more influential issues.

Therefore, it would be important to get the information on how raising a child on and off reservations is different for women who grew up on reservations (Hodge, 2009; Rizos and Krizova, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, previous studies have concentrated on the generalization of the people from the Reservations.

This study will open the window for women from reservations and specifically Native American Indians to give the experiences they have gone through both on and off the reservation (Swischer

[supanova_question]

Standardization versus Customization of a Global Brand Report college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Introduction

Understanding Consumer Buying Behavior and Brand Development

Conclusion

Reference List

Executive Summary What must be understood is that the way in which a product is promoted in one country (i.e. the name of the product, its general appearance, and how a company chooses to appeal to consumers) is often engineered to appeal to the cultural and social predilections of that particular consumer population.

However, not all consumers in the global market place have the same tastes when it comes to particular methods of marketing a product. It is based on this that this paper will explore standardization versus customization of a global brand in order to determine the effectiveness of either met

Introduction Branding is an important aspect of selling products since it is the manner in which consumers differentiate one product from the rest in terms of what the brand represents such as quality, product longevity and popularity (Viswanathan and Dickson 2007, pp. 46-63).

This can often be seen in various advertisements wherein a brand name product is often compared to Brand X (a metaphor for another company’s products) wherein the brand name product that is being promoted is shown to be superior in terms of quality and value.

However, the promotion of a particular brand is not limited to a products home market; rather, companies tend to expand into other international markets in order to be more competitive against their rivals in the same industry.

For example, international advertising initiatives such as those done by Unilever, Pepsi and Kraft Foods all attempt to target new markets within foreign countries due to flat growth in their main consumer markets (i.e. the U.S.)

They do this by utilizing various local pop culture icons in print ads and television advertisements in order to create an association between such stars and the product the company wants to sell thus resulting in a far greater degree of sales and product patronage.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, this is a form of informative advertising wherein companies seek to create greater awareness for their products/services.

The reason behind such actions was noted in the work of Chang (1995) where it was stated that companies often implement a form of product customization in order to make a product more appealing to a local culture (Chang 1995, pp. 5-10).

As such, based on the work of Chang (1995) this necessitates the development of new brand promotion initiatives that appeal more to the target market in the country that the company is attempting to penetrate.

The reason behind such attempts at developing an appeal that is more in line with the tastes of the local populace instead of relying on the traditional branding of the company is due the presence of already well-established brands within the targeted markets with similar products lines (Chae and Hill 2000, pp. 538-562).

Attempting to penetrate such markets with a branding strategy that was utilized in a company’s home market where there is already an assortment of local brands that are popular with local consumers in the new target market could result in a relatively low product uptake which could result in significant financial losses for the company.

One way of overcoming this was actually shown by Wal-Mart when it entered into the Chinese market. What the company did was bring in it’s own branding into China yet adjusted its product lineup to include local favorites that would be bought by consumers.

On the other hand, while Wal-mart was successful in integrating itself into an international market, other companies were not so lucky with particular brands such as Pepsi initially suffering a setback in the Chinese market due to the way in which the phrase “Come alive with Pepsi!” (a phrase used in a lot of its branding initiatives) was translated erroneously resulting in “Pepsi brings your ancestors back from the dead”.

We will write a custom Report on Standardization versus Customization of a Global Brand specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The last example of which showcases how branding can go wrong happened when Gerber attempted to market its products in South Africa.

What must be understood is that literacy is often an issue in this part of the world resulting in canned products often bearing a photo of what is outside of it to tell people what is in the product.

Thus, when marketed in South Africa sales of Gerber’s products plummeted since people though that the product contained processed babies.

Taking such factors into consideration, it can be seen that it is often necessary to rebrand a product in order for it be successful in a local market given the potential for cultural misunderstandings to arise resulting in low product sales.

However, this is not to say that adopting a standardized method of brand promotion is not effective.

Companies such as Mc Donald’s, Toyota and Ford have implemented a pretty standardized brand strategy across different markets and have emerged as globally competitive companies with well-recognized brands.

When analyzing such aspects, it is necessary to examine standardization versus customization of a global brand in order to determine which method of branding would be advantageous for a company looking to establish itself in other global markets.

Understanding Consumer Buying Behavior and Brand Development It is rather interesting to note that various theories of consumer decision-making processes always seem to assume that consumers pass through distinct stages/steps before, during and after the process of selecting a particular product to buy or service to utilize.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Standardization versus Customization of a Global Brand by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More What must be understood is that an average consumer is influenced by a myriad of different factors that affect the way in which they choose to patronize a particular product or service (Brierley 2012, pp. 225-233).

This can range from various psychological reactions such as the way in which they think and feel about different products (i.e. brand perception) to the way in which the market environment they are currently present in affects the way in which they perceive a particular product or service (i.e. local culture, their family, local media influences, etc.) (Wagner et al. 2009, pp. 69-85).

For example, the 2008 financial crisis and the subsequent financial recession the U.S. and Europe is currently experiencing have greatly affected the way in which consumers perceive particular products or services at the present (Wagner et al., 2009, pp. 69-85).

Consumers these days have become more conservative in their spending habits resulting in the resurgence of popular brands such as Mc Donald’s who have great product offerings at incredibly low prices.

What is interesting though, is how affordability and lower incomes affect consumer choice and thus brand development.

The concept of rational behavior assumes that all consumers are rational individuals who try to use their earned income in order to derive the greatest amount of satisfaction/ utility.

In other words, consumers try to get the most out of their income through rational buying behavior which results in a maximization of total utility from the products or services used (Rossiter

[supanova_question]

Credit Cards and Making Payments Case Study college essay help near me

Abstract Credit cards are cards that are used by customers to make payments. The customer gets credit in his card with the promise that he or she will pay back the money to the company later after making purchases. The customer pays back the money with interest.

This interest is the profit and revenue to the credit company. There are some customers who refuse to pay back the money, causing huge losses to the company.

Studying the behaviour of the customers and capturing information related to the customers will help the companies determine who to give credit based on their behaviours and projected creditworthiness.

Introduction Technology has grown rapidly over the last couple of decades, changing the way most things used to be done traditionally. Technology has made things easier and more efficient. The business world has been transformed greatly by the introduction of technology.

Technology has facilitated innovation in business by increasing the efficiency, quality of services offered to the customers, as well as the profitability of businesses.

On the other hand, technology has also affected the buying behaviour of customers in a positive way. Customers can now make payments using debit cards (Houghton, 2009).

Customers can borrow money using credit cards. The customer is given an advance and expected to pay with interest. This method of payment has been met with a number of challenges in that some people default the debts and refuse to pay, leading to credit card companies making huge losses.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the companies are now developing new ways that they can use to track customers and make them pay the dues. This article will focus on the issues concerned with credit cards.

Summary of the case The case is about the new credit card profiling methods that have resulted from the increase in the number of people who fail to pay their credits. All sales made using a credit card are recorded and stored in a database and the information is used by the credit company for various purposes.

The records indicate the type of purchase the customer made. The information is used by companies to target promotions. For instance, frequent buyers of a given commodity can be targeted and given discounts. According to the case, the cards can also be used to guard users against fraud.

This is possible when the company notices an unusual buying behaviour of the card user. Another use of credit cards is that they can be used to control users who charge more than their cards’ limits or have erratic spending habits. Finally, the cards are used for the purposes of tracking criminals.

The case explains how the credit card companies make profits from the interests paid by card users. It also exhibits how users default their credits and cause huge losses for the companies.

However, it goes on to explain how the companies can reduce the losses by studying the behaviours of customers and then determining the people who are creditworthy and those who are not. The case suggests that some behaviour indicate the inability of a customer to pay their balances.

Finally, the case highlights the effort by the US Congress to investigate the use of profiling by credit card companies to determine the rates of interests charged on customers. The Congress is expected to pass a bill that will deter companies from raising interest rates for no valid reasons.

We will write a custom Case Study on Credit Cards and Making Payments specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Case Study Questions Competitive strategy

The competitiveness of a business organization is very important in the bid to maximize its profit. It is important to note that every business organization is established with the primary goal of making profits.

The credit card companies make profits from the interests they earn from giving customers advance cash for their shopping. Therefore, they have to come up with ways of minimizing the number of credit defaulters among their customers to gain a competitive advantage in their business.

In so doing, companies are developing mathematical analyses to study and understand the behaviour of customers. Credit companies believe that understanding such behaviours will help them give money to customers who are more likely to pay.

The information systems are important in supporting this strategy because they give more details on the behaviour of customers (Silver Lake Editors, 2005).

Benefits of analysing customer purchase data and constructing a behavioural profile

The system records the data related to a purchase when a customer purchases a good or a service using the credit card. This information is important in that the company can use it to prevent any potential fraud by the users. Frauds are likely to cause huge losses on the side of the company.

The company is also able to use the data to detect any unusual purchases made by the customers, which could be an indicator of a lost card. The card could be stolen and used by another person.

This increases the trust that customers have in the company since the company helps them to track their lost cards. Consumer trust is a competitive advantage to the company.

Constructing behavioural profiles helps the company in determining the creditworthiness of the customers (Leonard

[supanova_question]

Strategic Information System Planning Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Introduction It is notable that even with the outstanding advancement of the Information Technology and the widespread use of computer science and internet services in the regular works of individuals, the use of Strategic Information System or SIS had not been very widespread in the business organisations even before two decades.

Rather, SIS was considered parallel to the commercial data processing systems, and so, it was merely used at the very low-level operational works to help ordinary works; nevertheless, there has been a mounting awareness to construct information systems of strategic magnitudes at all firms; therefore, at present, “Strategic Information System Planning” is a decisive factor at all levels.

It is important to note that planning for information systems, must, at any stages, start with the detection of the key requirements; however, for effectual outcome, generation of IT-based arrangement must be a reply to the requirement at the convoluted corporate stages; it must be kept in mind that planning for SISP is similar to strategic management planning.

In addition, proper management of SISP also requires aim, preferences, and agreements for information systems to be formalised; moreover, the plan should be sufficiently explicit to facilitate perceptive code of conduct; the users must know about the exact sequence of generation of the idea; additionally, the plan needs to be supple so that the preferences could be accustomed where essential.

SISP is the examination of a firm’s IT procedures by the use of gracious and convenient models; it is also the assessment of hazards and present needs; it generates an action plan indicating the requirements, which are indispensable to line up data use with strategic direction; in addition, SISP could recognise the best targets for buying and settling new SIS.

In order to conduct the research on strategic information system planning, this paper focuses on reviewing SISP, discussing the Strategic Information System Planning, analysing the strategic IS planning techniques, evaluating information system planning techniques, methodologies regarding SISP, recommendations, and conclusion.

Review of Strategic Information System Planning: Pant and Hsu (1995) pointed out that strategic information system is computer system, which put into practice corporate policies; however, to be more specific, these authors have noted that Strategic Information System Planning (or SISP) is more often practised to react more quickly and smartly to regular trading activities. Rogerson and Fidler (1994) and Pant and Hsu (1995) pointed out in their respective research papers that Strategic Information System Planning helps a firm to automate its regular operational activities in order to attain higher competence, control, success, and efficacy; SISP is purely used to offer the upper administration with adequate, reliable information to help maintain the trading activities effortlessly.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, Rogerson and Fidler (1994) and Pant and Hsu (1995) also added that strategic information system planning technique is used to study all features carefully and to plan innovative directions effectively; on the other hand, these researchers further noted that SISP does not in itself augment commercial productivity either in long term or even in small term period.

Nevertheless, it is very important to note that Bergeron, Buteau and Raymond (1991) suggested wonderfully in their research that strategic information system planning has turned out to be a fundamental and indispensable element for today’s corporations, as it optimistically influences corporate prosperity and expansion; moreover, if aptly managed, SISP could create new markets and new business opportunities in longer period.

According to Fergerson (2012), SISP unswervingly influences the aggressive attitude of a firm, providing it with more benefits than the rival firms do; however, it is vital to state that there are three kinds of information-arrangements, which for example, include financial-arrangements, operational-arrangements, as well as strategic-arrangements; nevertheless, the classifications are not reciprocally distinctive and they frequently overlie each other.

However, it highly essential to state that better focussed financial arrangements and operational arrangements could turn into the strategic arrangements for a specific firm, and Fergerson (2012) has further added that financial arrangements are the crucial mechanisation for the bookkeeping, financial-planning, and investment manoeuvres of firms; it is notable that these features are comparable and omnipresent in every firm.

Armstrong (1982) suggested that SISP is based on two key arguments; the first one suggests that organisational IT infrastructure mechanisms must be connected with the general corporate policy; however, at this point it is vital to scrutinise how corporate leaders’ policy (which could be either market-focused or operations-focused) influence the capacity to acquire competence and purchaser-service advantage from ERP expenditure.

On the other hand, the second one suggests that firms could better manage information system based configuration or competitive-advantage through application of practical, proper, and generous procedures; in addition, it is vital to note that according to Bozarth (2006), such a procedure is particularly pertinent to ERP expenditures, with regard to expenses and long standing influence.

Bozarth (2006) suggested that six elements could better describe a tremendous strategic information system planning procedure; however, these elements are discussed in the table below:

We will write a custom Research Paper on Strategic Information System Planning specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Six elements of strategic information system planning procedure (I) Inclusiveness Bozarth (2006) has pointed out that this refers to the level to which a firm makes an effort to turn thorough and all-encompassing while taking and putting together tactical choices (II) Conventionalization It is important to note that conventionalization refers to the survival of arrangements, practices, dealings, and strategies, which direct the scheduling practice of a firm (III) Concentration The author has noted that this can be described as a stability amid originality and management directions, which are intrinsic in the tactical preparation scheme; however, a pioneering direction accentuates pioneering resolutions to handle prospects and threats; in addition, an integrative direction accentuates power, as applied during financial plans, resource allotment, as well as benefit administration (IV) Top to down surge The upper management, along with the full-time support of the subordinate staff, must instigate the strategic information system planning (V) Broad contribution Although the preparation surge is top to down, contribution should engage numerous purposeful regions as well as key stakeholder in all stages of the firm (VI) Elevated constancy Regular conferences and evaluations of general approaches should differentiate the Strategic Information System Planning; moreover, it is vital to note that the commendation in the SISP narrative is further present in the everyday administration narrative; on the other hand, the companies should institute an official top to down scheduling procedure in order to tie information scheme policy to corporate requirements as they shift towards development in their administration direction, scheduling, union, and organisation phases of information technology Table 1: Six elements of strategic information system planning procedure

Source: Self generated from Bozarth (2006)

It is highly essential to state the fact that in order to carry out Strategic Information System Planning successfully throughout the firm’s operational activities, it is vital for them to focus on a number of other factors which are necessary to ensure that the strategic information system planning has been conducted in the aptest way for that particular firm.

As a result, at this stage of the paper, it is highly essential to have a glance at the number of other factors, which are vital for the proper planning process; however, the following table has been used in this purpose for convenience:

Phases Activities Expansion of an early contract regarding the tactical scheduling attempt Basahel and Irani (2009) has pointed out that it is vital to deal with the rationale of the endeavour, settle on favoured stepladders in the progression, agree on outward appearance and phase of news, and deal with responsibility, tasks, and devotion of the deliberate scheduling organization team Recognition and amplification of authorizations Basahel and Irani (2009) has pointed out that it is vital to distinguish and amplify the authorizations; in order to do so, it is significant to categorize and elucidate the outwardly obligatory official and unceremonious authorizations, which are positioned over the concerned firm from a number of different spheres Progression and illumination of the key visions and standards of the concerned firm According to Basahel and Irani (2009), focusing on the enlargement and illumination of the firm’s vision and standard is very significant to make sure that the entire team is in accord with the core business principles for better outcomes Outer circumstantial consideration The authors have further added that under any situation, it is essential to keep an eye on the outer incidental contemplation; as a result, the examination of the surroundings in regard to the outer association must be continuously encouraged in long run for finding out the prospects and dilemmas, together with governmental, financial, societal, and scientific drifts Inner circumstantial evaluation Cheong, Corbitt and Pita (2011) pointed out that evaluation of the firm’s strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats must be circulated throughout the corporate hierarchy; in addition, further scrutiny is needed in regards of resource and capabilities, current policy, as well as existing performance Tactical subject recognition as well as policy improvement and reputable portrayal of the firm in the upcoming years An abridgment of the earliest levels is necessary to resolve elementary strategy queries influencing the firm’s permissions, visions and significance, product orientation, customers, stakeholder, expenditure, investments, and administration or secretarial devise; nevertheless, the tactics should be created to handle the matters discovered in the preceding stages Table 2: Factors, which are vital for the proper planning process

Source: Self-generated from Basahel and Irani (2009)

Gottschalk (1999) has noted that SIS actions should consider the company’s policy and a range of outer aspects (such as arrangement of rivals and vendors, and the prominence of the schemes previously in the corporation); moreover, at this stage, it is essential to note that the ensuing scheme must encompass three unified stages; information system, information management, and information technology.

Earl (1993) pointed out that the task of Strategic Information System Planning is a very difficult job from an overall viewpoint; however, throughout past twenty years, the IT infrastructures of firms have developed because of the progression of the scientific world and for the enhanced use of computer-based systems; as a result, use of this planning process is now widespread.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Strategic Information System Planning by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Discussion on the Strategic Information System Planning Pant and Hsu (1995) pointed out that to plan strategic information systems for a firm in the longer period, it is vital to focus on and revive the three-epoch model; this model indicates that some unlike, but overlying decades of information system existed since 1960s; as a result, the link between those decades are discussed in the table below:

Decades Information systems Features 1960s Data Processing or DP was the most common method The key features were computers, remote from the part of the customers, as well as price lessening utility 1970s to 1980s Most businesses used Management Information Systems or MIS At this time, the main purposes that MIS was able to serve were dispersed and unified procedure, synchronized mechanisms through administration service, and user-driven help for the company 1980s to 1990s The drive was towards Strategic Information Systems or SIS The key characteristic of this system was networked and incorporated scheme, which were obtainable and accommodating to customers; however, the system was connected to corporate strategy, facilitating the business Table 3: Decades of information system since 1960s

Source: Self generated from Pant and Hsu (1995)

Basahel and Irani (2009) has amazingly suggested in the research paper that SISP is the currently preferred system among the businesses organisations; however, incorporating this is an extremely tough job as the procedure is profoundly entrenched in commercial-processes; conversely, this must satisfy the requirements of the firm, serving corporate aims and generating benefits as well as meeting data-processing and MIS-requirements.

Rogerson and Fidler (1994) noted that the main thing is that the firms need SIS not merely as a device for lessening expenses, but also as a way to adding value; nevertheless, a number of the benefits of applying a model generated through an SISP for the business organisations has been broadly outlined in the chart below for better understanding:

Key advantages The advantages of a model generated through the application of strategic information system planning Flexibility of services Bozarth (2006) noted that strategic information system planning is flexible; it can expand or condense mechanically and offer resources on-demand for abundant archetypal magnitudes as well as servers; on-demand feature of SISP means that as demand increases or decreases, the capability could much smoothly match up the demand; additionally, there is no need to over-provision for the peaks. During the functional stages, it could approve a firm’s expert team to inflate, categorise, and function swiftly without any danger, without thinking about the position or infrastructure; moreover, Bozarth (2006) also noted that it could provide associates of the firm with straightforward access to a cost-effective, lithe technology pedestal for running efficiently in terms of applications aptitude and scalability Less expenses required According to Fergerson (2012), use of SISP matches cash-flow more accurately than the conformist techniques; in the past, organising all these required immense investments; in addition, other risk factors were present as well, which comprised crumple of IT for lower user-acceptance; however, the author noted that now, SISP can transfer organisations from capital investment to an operational expenditure level More responsive business conduct Armstrong (1982) has pointed out that strategic information system planning could progress receptiveness; moreover, the pace at which the new system performs most of the tasks in all stages remains a key benefit of the SISP; with an apt SISP firms could be efficient at adding more storage, network-bandwidth, memory, computing power, and using IT amenities to fluently affix, amend, or mutate a function at short time Instant recovery of the system in case of any breakdown Gottschalk (1999) noted in his research paper that by applying an apt SISP, the job of managing technicalities is transferred on the technology-provider; the firm’s responsibility is to give built-in data-protection, fault lenience, self-healing, and malfunction revitalisation, whereas in preceding technologies, failure recovery charges were more than the cost of set up, in new model, this could be lower Easy to use and control irrespective of method and position Earl (1993) pointed out that through the application of a model generated through SISP, it will be rather unproblematic to assist end-users to contact systems, despite their position or the tool they are using; any staff could punctually come online, far-off headquarters could be instantaneously connected, temporary groups could be readily set-up on-site, and variable access could be instantly facilitated Less impact over the environment A number of researchers of the present era have noted that a model generated through the application of strategic information system planning would produce no environmental impact at long run; however, if a firm uses the conventional methods, they would have to conduct many things manually and as a result, they would leave carbon footprint or even any other kind of pollution on the environment Table 4: Advantages of a model generated through the application of strategic information system planning

Source: Self generated from Bozarth (2006), Fergerson (2012), Armstrong (1982), Gottschalk (1999), and Earl (1993)

Strategic IS Planning Techniques:

Basahel and Irani (2009) pointed out that it is necessary to have a detailed framework to formulate an effectual strategic information system that contains planning techniques to provide enhanced flexibility to implement the aggregate processes in order to reach goals of the organisation.

In addition, Rogerson and Fidler (1994), Basahel and Irani (2009), Bozarth (2006), Pant and Hsu (1995), and Fergerson (2012) suggested that the framework for SISP would integrate significant analysis, essential to construct the IS-strategy that would circumvent profound facts along with unambiguous system requirements for the reason that those details can clarify the necessary techniques for entire SISP development progression.

On the other hand, Rogerson and Fidler (1994), Basahel and Irani (2009), Bozarth (2006), Pant and Hsu (1995), and Fergerson (2012) have further added that thus, the procedure required to undertake sundry approaches comprise of numerous jobs to engender apt resolution; however, there is no doubt that in order to attain success the entire task should be carried out watchfully.

Basahel and Irani (2009) also added that Mintsberg presented the most effectual model of SISP by integrating stage of growth analysis, whereas the organisational theory is deeply connected with the model with intention to attain at a desired level of organisational development through SISP.

Pant and Hsu (1995) and Fergerson (2012) have added that without the apt application of the Strategic Information System Planning, it would be impossible for the business in modern word to sustain in long run.

At the same time, the SDLC1 methods always differ in accordance with the associated process of SISP and its concerned advantage and disadvantage are interdependent with the business model that the organisation has put into practice.

On the other hand, diverse strategic IS planning tools are applied considering of their scope, limitation and size where a categorisation of techniques would express their benefits, reward, and drawback associated with the entire implication method that would keep significant contribution in the SISP planning process.

Evaluating Information System Planning Techniques:

In order to evaluate an effective SISP, it is essential to have persuasive tools, a framework for evaluation, and a greater understanding of the techniques of strategic IS planning (where the evaluation processes would emphasis on the evaluation framework to identify the associated gaps and address right solution to mitigate the explored gaps and dilemmas).

Depending on the different criteria and the different strategic levels, the entire SISP would be evaluated by considering the applied methods and frameworks with suitable contents and symbols that would highly ensure trouble-free understanding of the application procedures.

The evaluation process of SISP would also ensure correct assessment of the IS planning techniques, their skeleton, implication of decision making process, and integrated tools (that would support the technical team with a rich explanation of what the management desires and how the process would facilitate the identification of the competitiveness as well as alignment and dimensions of the SISP).

Moreover, the processes of SISP would be evaluated in opposition to the used IS drivers, where it is essential to compare the evaluation tools with ISD2 to accelerate the evaluation process focusing on the applied strategy by conducting a detailed analysis of the entire SISP process.

Methodologies regarding strategic information system planning Palanisamy (2005) has pointed out that in order to find out the deficiencies of addressing the ever-shifting SIS planning needs, it is necessary to focus on six admired SIS-planning methodologies; it is notable that the current SIS methodologies could be chiefly categorised into “impact” and “alignment” models; however, the detailed rationalisation of the methodologies are given in the table below:

Value chain analysis Value chain analysis is a type of corporate activity analysis; most companies accumulate actions to create patterns, manufacture, sell, distribute, and maintain its items; however, all these actions concentrate on the key value-adding corporate actions that could be made more effectual with IT; nevertheless, it does not concentrate on matters of systems development; it only deals with manufacturing firms Critical success factors Palanisamy (2005) noted that this methodology discovers the key information needs for the success of the company; it actually deals with the need of superior administration and it constructs information systems about those needs; it ignores value-adding aspects of SIS; however, it is more investigative method based on managerial control sculpt of decisive decisions Business systems planning from IBM Palanisamy (2005) noted that this methodology is procedure-oriented; it unites top-down examination and schedules bottom-up operation; here, the statistics are taken from corporate procedures; however, this system is too comprehensive, lengthy, and expensive, and it does not encompass any tactic for software-design; conversely, the scheduling team needs a high quantity IT knowledge as well Strategic systems planning (SSP) Palanisamy (2005) has pointed out that strategic system planning focuses on practical arenas of the company and the information design is taken from the company’s purposeful sculpt; moreover, the statistics are used to spot and plan new appliance methods; in addition, SSP merges top and bottom-up performance through prearranged methods, and build-up response for all system progression troubles Information engineering (IE) Palanisamy (2005) noted that information engineering is highly data-oriented and it gives procedure for construction of scheme data, course of action for managing models, and an all-inclusive understanding base; the acquaintance-base gives guiding principles to design and preserve data systems; even though information engineering is an inclusive tactic, it is widespread and the achievement depends on the manager or head Method from Anderson Consulting This is an encrusted system, with methodology at the upper level, ‘practices’ in the middle stratum, and equipment partisan methods at the substructure level; most of the assisting methods include DFD, matrix investigation, operational disintegration, centre groups and so on; it is notable that this method is inclusive and automatic materials are given; at the same time, this system is costly, excessively comprehensive, and too protracted Table 5: Methodologies regarding strategic information system planning

Source: Self generated from Palanisamy (2005)

Recommendations In order to carry out the Strategic Information System Planning aptly, the business leaders of the firms must first set up planning process, institute a scheduling board, build up obligation amid the upper administration, create a project team, recognise information technology prospect, create corporate revelation and objectives, scrutinise business environment, and boost and endorse the critical success factors.

In addition, the business leaders of the firms must then find out the central performance indicators, discover corporate policies, formulate information system scheme, assess fresh IT infrastructure and information quality, appraise and develop the existing IT policy, analyse the IT atmosphere, find out new prospects, and compare and assess the corporate policies and IT opportunities.

On the other hand, it is also vital for the companies to implement operational examination and business process re-engineering, stipulate the technicalities, carry out assessment of the regular developments, sort out procedures requiring modifications, realise and measure current systems, find out and employ highly specialised IT engineers, describe data structural design, derive general IT solutions, and set standards and policies.

It is further essential for the corporate leaders and general managers to take special care to examine the entire system and set explicit requirements for IS development, discover precise components for execution, create of progression for IT expansion, and keep thorough record of the entire working practices.

It is highly crucial for businesses to gain managerial pledge, so the high-level managers or other influential leaders should be quickly selected to guide the entire team according to that pledge.

The business should allow itself with enough time to do adequate homework, and train and educate the team members, as well as amassing statistics regarding company’s tasks and current IT support and generating work schedules accordingly.

On the other hand, the other departments of the firm must employ a responsible person to support and re-evaluate the overall performance of the team, re-evaluate and gather corporate data, and clarify recent IT activities completed and top IT executive issues.

Additionally, the operational procedures should be clearly stated, and the associated partners should clearly find out the firm’s procedures; the firm should structure the foundation of dialogues, characterise the upcoming data design, categorise the data classes based on associations to business operations, analyse present employee’s working attitudes, and know the way in which the SIS support is assisting the firm.

Most essentially, the firm and its responsible leaders should verify executive perceptions, and arrange regular discussions to achieve devotion and confer compassion for any troubles whose resolutions would be given by future schemes; on the other hand, the teams should use the current processes and data classes to invent databases; however, they should regularly sort out the priorities.

The owners of the firm must reassess information reserve, consider the recent strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats of the firm, create apt action plan, arrange that action plan with advice regarding hardware and software, and alter the worn-out conventional methods.

Conclusion Information technology-based business organisations should be organised through an accommodating technique whereby every phase of life cycle are affianced to bring suppleness, superiority, and efficiency; nevertheless, the technique must be comparable to the incorporation of product life cycle; conversely, the present research works are inclined to back information-planning as an isle isolated from the affluence of firm’s information resources.

It is highly essential at this phase of the paper to note that a completely fresh tactic is necessary for the firms to differentiate the business and to permit amalgamation of the scheduling phase with SIS.

In addition, the firms must recognise and appreciate the advantages of the models, which are generated through the application of Strategic Information System Planning; in addition, it is notable that through implementing those models, firms could attain leading position in market and achieve greater success not only in terms of enhanced profit margins, but also in terms of goodwill.

Reference List Armstrong, J. S. (1982). The value of formal planning for strategic decisions: Review of empirical research. Strategic Management Journal, 3(3), 197-211.

Basahel, A.

[supanova_question]

Operational Decision Making Dubal Company (Dubai Aluminum Ltd) Case Study best essay help: best essay help

Company description Dubal is a major manufacturer and supplier of aluminum products. The company’s mission is to be the leading company in global aluminum production. The company also aims to lead in marketing of aluminum products by the year 2020.

The company is perceived to be a major supplier of alloy products to the automotive industry. Moreover, the company also supplies billet, foundry alloys to construction, electronics and aerospace industries.

The company is also renowned for producing water products through thermal desalination. The company’s major markets are located globally, with China, Europe, North America and Middle East being major market destinations.

Description of operations Aluminum smelting

This is the initial aluminium production process that involves extraction of aluminium from its oxide (Davis 1). This procedure takes place in stages, where bauxite is turned into Alumina and then through an aluminium smelter where it is eventually turned into aluminium.

Raw material handling

The company procures high quality materials from various parts of the world. The company sources raw materials like alumina, aluminium fluoride and calcined petroleum coke from Australia, India and the United States respectively.

Sourced imports pass through Jebel Ali Port. This is because the company has storage facilities for its raw materials at the port. Moreover, the company import raw materials in bulk and later transport the materials to the manufacturing plant by road tankers.

Carbon anode manufacturing

This is an on-site manufacturing process. The carbon anodes are necessary for the electrolysis process used in aluminum reduction process (Kvande

[supanova_question]

Operations custom essay help

Develop initial fire ground operations on a single-family home utilizing the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134. Please create your own tactical worksheet for dynamic fire ground. Please submit a pdf of this tactical worksheet. You may use your departments command board sheet or a generic worksheet.

This is an initial response.

You have 3 Engines, 2 Rescues and Battalion responding to the scene here. You are command (Battalion).

[supanova_question]

The Clowning Around Company Report best essay help: best essay help

The main idea, what is the key selling proposition across all communications?

The main idea is to employ marketing communications to help the ‘Clowning Around’ business to grow faster than ever before. This will involve using messages and related media to pass information and engage or communicate with the target audiences.

The key selling proposition across all communications is to create awareness, inform, and persuade customers to buy clowns or magicians for birthday parties, business events as well as private functions from the Clowning Around Company.

The Clowning Around organization intends to apply consistent brand messages across a myriad of marketing channels such as adverts, sales promotions, and PR, as well as publicity to make consumers loyal to its products.

Who is the target audience and why?

The ‘Clowning Around’ business targets individuals organizing birthday parties, business event organizers, and private function organizers. The company deals with clowns and magicians for birthday parties, business events, and private functions.

Therefore, the right clientele for the products supplied by the Clowning Around’ organization are the above mentioned target audience. They require clowns and magicians to satisfy their needs during their functions and events.

What is the main message per medium?

Advertising

The Clowning Around business intends to use advertising as one of the promotion tools to create awareness, inform, and persuade the target audience to purchase its products.

It also intends to use this medium consistently in order to keep reminding the existing customers that it provides products made particularly to satisfy their needs. There are several types of advertising readily available for the Clowning Around Company.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These include mass advertising, outdoor advertising, online advertising, and direct marketing ads. The advertising message will position both the product (clowns and magicians) and the company in the target audience minds’.

This will eventually motivate and make customers loyal to the products of Clowning Around Company making it increase its market share, and hence make huge profits.

The marketing managers of the Clowning Around organization will pay close attention to what the target audience needs, and then create an advertising message that engages and motivates them to purchase its products.

The advertising message will also be aimed at establishing the company’s brand within the minds of the customers.

Sales Promotion

The marketing managers of the Clown Around business intend to use sales promotions as a part of the promotion tools to encourage the target audience to recognize the brand, and become loyal customers.

This means that they will invest in creative services such as talent voices, graphic designers, photographs, and modelling among others to reach more customers.

The marketers of this business will hire professionals to do radio recording, coupons, and host contests among other events to promote the sales of clowns and magicians. They can also offer free samples to the target audience so that they can sample the products.

We will write a custom Report on The Clowning Around Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This will make them recognize the offers and become loyal to the business. The sales promotion messages will offer buyers an extra incentive to purchase.

They also enhance short-term goals such as grabbing market share from other competitors, seeking attention from new customers, and increasing consumption among others.

Publicity

The Clowning Around Company understands that it cannot survive on its own. It needs to interact consistently with the target audience (customers), employees, stakeholders, government officials, and the society.

Therefore, it will ensure that it gets involved in special events, news releases, community events, interviews, and charity events among others. During these occasions their representatives will pass a message to the viewers, and the target audience about the efforts it has made to satisfy their needs.

They can also use such opportunities to position the Clowning Around business by informing customers why they should purchase clowns and magicians for events from the company.

Engaging with the public can make the business attract a lot of customers, and make them loyal to the company and its products.

[supanova_question]

Just Us! Marketing Plan Case Study online essay help

Situation Analysis The Canadian coffee market is experiencing very fast growth as competition intensifies among the industry players. Each of the industry players is seeking to be established strategically within the market as a way of cementing their positions as retailers of the commodity.

Just Us! only operates within a smaller market area in Nova Scotia, yet it requires to expand the market outreach to effectively beat the growing competition from other players. Competition is mainly based on the fair trade coffee concept, which is more than a mere product brand.

Objectives The unique business ideology, the focus on retail and wholesale business, as well as the specialised market approach will enable Just Us! to penetrate into newer markets other than the traditional Nova Scotia market. Just Us! will effectively break into the entire Canadian market in 2015.

Company Analysis Just Us! has its goals focused on achieving significant viability and sustaining progressive Fair Trade business that serves the workers, the society, and takes into account the aspect of environmental sustainability.

The company’s culture is rooted in the idea of returning value, especially to the community of producers who often are taken advantage of by the middlemen.

The unique Just Us! cafe experience is set to attract more coffee consumers just to share in the experience. The unique cafes have revolutionised the coffee business as they offer buyers with an all new experience that varies greatly from the traditional shopping experience.

More buyers are likely to embrace and appreciate this new model, resulting in the company making huge sales and revenues in return.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Opportunities

Exclusive coffee shops and cafes have strongly grown and become embraced fully by the market.

People have integrated this practise into their lifestyles, thereby providing a rising demand for the commodity and related services. In turn, this offers Just Us! a lucrative and highly promising market to serve.

Competitive Advantage Sources

Just Us! is a strong enterprise that has expanded its product line to include a variety of products, including sugar, tea, and chocolate. These wide ranges of products are organically manufactured. This helps the company to attract a significant number of customers.

Additionally, Just Us! has strategically established its coffee cafes within the compounds of various university institutions. This is a critically strong area for the company because most of the university students are concerned about fair trade and organic commodities.

The main weakness for Just Us! is its small market area within which it operates. The venture has failed to establish a significant market presence outside Canada’s Maritime Provinces, despite having begun operating in 1996.

The company equally lacks a more elaborate system of distribution compared to some of its market rivals like Kraft Foods and Nestle.

The market share for Just Us! is comparatively small because of the company’s limited business performance. Lack of experience in management has seen the company’s advertisement done dismally. This has limited the extent of its market penetration efforts.

We will write a custom Case Study on Just Us! Marketing Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Customer Analysis Just Us! serves an elaborate customer base that includes wholesale buyers, offices, individuals, and coffee cafe buyers. Several selling points have been established by the company to ensure that customers benefit from the unique selling points.

The office customers mainly entail employees and employers who take coffee as they continue with their jobs at their places of work. The wholesale buyers, on the other hand, acquire the coffee in bulk for purposes of selling to small scale buyers.

Individual buyers purchase the commodity either from the cafes where they consume it on the spot or buy from the coffee shops for home consumption.

The business model value creation focuses on organic, as well as fair trade product certification. The certification reassures buyers that the products they acquire meet the highest quality standards, thereby enhancing return buying.

Just Us! products also rely on an elaborate distribution network that includes grocery chains, institutions of higher education, health food stores, specialised coffee shops, and restaurants.

This ensures strategic positioning, which allows buyers to gain access to the coffee easily even while undergoing their daily chores and career roles.

Buyers’ decision process depends on the health related implications of consuming coffee. Health concerns are a significant aspect among commodity consumers, thus any revelations indicating negative health implications are likely to affect the buying decision.

The degree with which product marketing is conducted equally influences purchase decisions made by buyers. Low advertising results in low purchase decisions, while high advertising transforms to high purchase decisions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Just Us! Marketing Plan by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Competition Analysis Just Us! faces intense competition in the market. This has affected its market position compared to its significant rivals. The competitors have worked towards establishing loyal customer bases in Nova Scotia where Just Us! has a strong market presence and share.

Additionally, well established chains have a presence in the market and they use their strong brand equity and financial base to tap into the ‘fair trade’ market concept.

Some of the competitors boast of well established and renowned brand names, such as Starbucks. These major brands have gradually expanded into Just Us!’s traditional Nova Scotia market region, thus enhancing their chances of eclipsing the latter in its own market.

Apart from selling coffee, most of the rival players have an expanded product line, including chocolate, espresso, salads, pastries, tea, and sandwiches that enable them to attract a huge number of buyers into their premises.

This helps them to build the revenue base easily because they do not depend on a narrow product portfolio.

The competitors, however, have a weakness of venturing into the market without fully considering the risks involved. In essence, most of the rival firms end up failing in their businesses.

Additionally, the competing firms do not seem to be keen on developing unique concepts like what Just Us! has achieved. Thus, they do not have a greater chance of establishing loyal firms compared to Just Us!

Brand Positioning Just Us! will position itself as a value product that is worth consuming on a daily basis. As a value product, all the branded commodities will remain affordable to the buyers to enable them purchase them on a daily basis.

Just Us! coffee will retail at a relatively lower price compared to the average price charged by the competitors in the industry.

The target market will mainly include home buyers, office consumers, and wholesalers. The home buyers consist of individuals who purchase the coffee product in its packaged form and go to their houses to prepare the beverage by themselves.

Office consumers consist of organisations or corporations that buy coffee for purposes of serving their staff and clientele. Wholesale buyers, on the other hand, consist of buyers who acquire Just Us! coffee in large quantities and sell the product in smaller quantities to retailers.

Just Us! will retain its emotional brand promise. As a fair trade company, Just Us! does more than just business as it seeks to empower the larger community. The company commits itself to continue with direct purchasing and acquisition of coffee products from producers without using middlemen.

Any consumer who acquires a Just Us! brand, therefore, will be enhancing the efforts of the company to support the producers who are based in various countries.

The company’s customers have a better reason to believe and trust its products because they have been packaged with a high quality aspect in mind.

While Just Us! provides a high quality product, it also ensures affordability on the part of the consumers by charging a lower price compared to the rivals.

Selected Marketing Strategy Just Us! will initiate a different strategy for marketing its products where it will consider adopting penetration pricing. In addition, the firm will advertise its products extensively and expand its distribution to enhance the distribution network and enhance the growth rate.

Action Plan Product

Just Us! will spread its product line to introduce product types such as sandwiches and salads within the next 12 months. The company will also seek to expand the coffee product, which is the core business competency of the firm.

Introducing salads and sandwiches will enable the company to target younger consumers at the age of 20, in addition to the usual consumer bracket. Just Us! will specially remodel the product offer to target the younger market segment between 20 and 24 years of age.

An addition of various brands of juices and sodas to the product line will enable the company to effectively address the needs of this new segment.

Price

Just Us! coffee will retail at $2 for each mug, while a packet weighing 500g will retail at $8. The company intends to penetrate new markets throughout Canada and set its prices slightly lower than what the competitors charge.

This approach in pricing in combination with the high quality coffee product will ensure that Just Us! will penetrate into newer markets easily. This will, in turn, see Just Us! expand its current market share.

Distribution

The company will begin selling the Just Us! coffee brand to the market through normal retailers and shops. This will be in addition to the currently existing distribution channel as a way of reaching more buyers.

Just Us! equally intends to practise franchising to increase the number of coffee stores and cafes spread across Canada.

In highly lucrative regional markets, the company will advance loans to willing franchisees to entice more traders and individuals in establishing franchise shops. This will see the market presence increase significantly.

Promotion

Just Us! will deploy sales representatives in at least five regions in Canada where it had not previously established operations. The sales representatives will play a critical role in ensuring that Just Us! develops new outlets for the distribution of its coffee products.

The firm will acquire a sales trainer whose main role will entail offering training to the newly hired sales force. To sustain this programme, the company will set aside an additional $150,000 to the company’s budget figure to meet the training costs.

Just Us! will increase advertising for the cafes and restaurants based in the various university market areas because of the lucrative nature of these market locations.

[supanova_question]

Toyota Plant Case – Lexus RX 330 Line plant location Analytical Essay college admission essay help

Introduction This paper looks into factors that will determine the Lexus RX 330 Line plant location. The plant can be located either in Canada (Toyota Motor Manufacturing Canada) or in the United States (North American plant in USA).

The team asses the location decision using a Weighting Model. The team tasked with the work of determining the location develops a list of factors, which are weighted using different weights, and the location with the highest score is chosen.

Weighting and choice of location The team develops several factors that will be influential in the company’s decision to find the plant’s location. The following are the factors. The factors are categorized into exogenous and endogenous typologies.

The exogenous factors refer to external factors that a company is not in control of while endogenous factors are factors within the control of the company. For example, a company can control salaries and wages but cannot control the availability of markets.

Endogenous

Salaries and wages

Internal Infrastructure

Exogenous

Laws and Regulations

Industry Competitiveness

Infrastructure external

Human Resources Availability

Taxation

Cost of Expert Expatriation

Regional Growth potential

Plant Expansion possibility

Cost of leasing

Market availability

After that, the team develops weights for each criteria depending upon the hierarchy of importance to the company operations (Schwalbe, 2012). The following weights and scores are assigned to each factor.

Examples of factors Economic Conditions

The motor industry is quite unpredictable. The industry had been recording slumps in profits intermittently since 2000. For example between 2001 and 2006, the industry recorded cumulative losses amounting to $42 billion. Toyota tries to operate in predictable markets to avoid such losses.

It had been making profits even in a time when the industry was recoding losses. For example, it has signed exclusive contracts to operate in particular countries (Toyota in US, Canada etc) to increase profitability and enhance predictability.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For the past decade, the prices of crude oil have been unpredictable because of terminal wars and global economic crises. This makes the industry to operate at a state in which it cannot accurately predict costs.

Additionally, in 2008 the world plunged in an economic crisis emanating from the finance systems of United States. This has led to a situation where world customers and businesses have cut spending spelling doom to an industry that mostly targets business and leisure customers.

Role of Government

Competitors and critics have constantly complained that success of Toyota is not attributable to its strategies. They have painted a picture where environmental forces, specifically governments, play a key role in the success of Toyota.

The industrial climate in those countries is favorable compared to other nations. That is why the company has invested in few different countries since inception and subsequently written off those investments. Critics argue that this indicates Toyota can only succeed in its own country.

However, this is untrue, according to management and Toyota proponents, as the company operates in a similar environment as other competitors and they have not matched Toyota’s global success.

Scores Criteria Weights North USA TMMC Laws and Regulations 0.2 61 93 Industry Competitiveness 0.05 69 69 Salaries and wages 0.08 85 71 Infrastructure 0.09 90 61 Human Resources Availability 0.15 52 59 Taxation 0.1 95 66 Cost of Expert Expatriation 0.05 58 50 Regional Growth potential 0.05 69 58 Plant Expansion possibility 0.12 53 56 Cost of leasing 0.06 91 51 Market availability 0.05 90 63 Calculations and results The team finds that Toyota Motor Manufacturing Canada is the ideal location for the new plant. The plant meets the criteria of having the highest score. The score is obtained by multiplying the respective weight with the respective score for each factor (Jacobs

[supanova_question]

Pop Culture and Music Critical Essay essay help free: essay help free

Table of Contents Introduction

Summary of content

Analysis of the text

Evaluation of the text

Reference List

Introduction The modern world has brought about many changes in the way popular music is created and interpreted. It is also significant how the culture of a certain place is reflected in the music.

Recently, gender roles and the way they are manifested in music are critically observed by the society. The media has a lot of influence on people’s demand for the types of music.

A book titled “Pop Music, Pop Culture” introduces several important themes that relate to the social makes-up of a culture, modernized views of status and gender, as well as the influence on the local population.

The title specifically prepares the reader for the interconnection between culture and popular music, as it is one entity that is a great part of human society and the music industry (Rojek 2011).

Summary of content The first part of the book starts off with the social division that the music and the demand create. The author mentions that for some time, certain genres and whole cultures of music have been dominated by different people. There are also specifics about gender.

Women are shown to play the role of possessions while men are shown promiscuous and are judged by the amount of women they can get as a form of social status.

The second part looks at theoretical perspectives, and how the society is “moved” into a certain direction that is dictated by the social views mixed with the unique nature of the popular music created.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The subliminal messages specifically target people who are easily influenced by the pop culture and its negative side.

The third part addresses the relationship between the organizations that produce the music with society and culture. Unfortunately, popular music has become a great business opportunity and people are looking to get rich fast, be it organizations or individuals with talent (Rojek 2011).

Analysis of the text There is no denying that rap and hip hop were originally created by African Americans, and they are still dominant in the culture. Rock is associated with European/American white population and pop is becoming more mixed every day.

Even a great number of jazz compositions are not aligned with the white population. But most recently, the music has become much more open minded. However, this has not taken away certain genres from groups of people.

There are individual artists who might become prosperous in a different genre but other than that, there is a division. The division between genders has been evident for a long time, with history to support this fact (Perry 2004).

This is a force which is dictated by the growing population. It is much more liberal in the selection of styles and the types of music. Profanity and vulgarity have become desensitized and people are used to seeing inappropriate images and portrayals in the music.

It has become divided between artists and there is some agreeing with Rojek. It seems as if certain music types have been registered with specific artists and portrayals of social life.

We will write a custom Book Review on Pop Culture and Music specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The end result leads to an understanding that the originality of music will be attributed to artists who are best at their own representation of style (Rojek 2011).

Evaluation of the text An extremely valuable point is made that a civilized society should not portray anyone as objects, especially in sexual terms (Rojek 2011).

When a society represents inappropriate views through music, it gets predisposed to the roles that people have, leading to most negative effect of the lyrics and videos which will influence the younger generation. The book is valuable and practical, as it gives people a warning.

Young children will expect individuals to be a certain way and will repeat such behavior in schools. Even though the society and laws have accepted the modernized culture, there is still much predisposition and discrimination (Gatens 1996).

Partly, this is due to the freedom of expression and the open mindedness that has been so welcome in the modern times. People are given an ability to do almost anything they want, and this has led to a few bad choices which must be rooted out from society.

I liked the book because it presents the relationship between the culture and popular music clearly and without any aversions.

It is true that there is a close connection between the lyrics and social views, provocative and derogatory language has had a significant influence on the conversations and labels that people apply to each other.

Since people often repeat the behavior they encounter, whatever is said and done in music transfers over to real life without a fully conscious choice (Biagi 2011). Music was always an important part of any society and its effects can be observed in all instances of life.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Pop Culture and Music by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In order for the music to change, people must raise the standards in how individuals are shown in the entertainment industry. “Pop Music, Pop Culture” does a great job in familiarizing the leaders with the causes and effects that can be seen in the modern society.

People have become engulfed in status and reputation that is made and stabilized through the music industry (Rojek 2011).

It is a must for any society to realize that the exhibited changes can be directed and controlled, as to have the best influence on the surrounding environment, and teach others a valuable lesson, instead of displaying how immature and inappropriate culture and popular music are.

Reference List Biagi, S 2011, Media Impact: An Introduction to Mass Media: An Introduction to Mass Media, Cengage Learning, Boston.

Gatens, M 1996, Imaginary Bodies: Ethics, Power

[supanova_question]

The Role of Leadership in Business and Its Advantages Analytical Essay essay help

Introduction Leadership is a critical ability that enables one to influence others in accomplishing an objective. In business, leadership entails strategic thinking in fulfilling a task to attain the objective of the organisation.

Leadership skills play a crucial role in determining the performance as organisations operate in the market and compete against each other.

Successful leaders are able to solve problems, understand people and the social systems clearly, as well as be in a position to accumulate knowledge for purposes of organising information.

This paper seeks to discuss the concept of leadership. The paper discusses the significant role of leadership in business, leadership advantages in the industry, and its importance in business.

Leadership Approach The Trait Approach

Leadership traits refer to comparatively stable, along with logical, combinations of personal characteristics. All these encourage consistent leadership performance (Zaccarro et al., 2004, p. 104).

The trait theorists looked at leadership on the basis of the characteristics that are commonly exhibited by individuals.

Among the notable traits highlighted by this school of thought include drive, leadership motivation, honesty and integrity, understanding business, as well as self-confidence and cognitive skills.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The drive trait is a compound characteristic that involves achievement, ambition, energy, and motives. Additionally, it also reflects on tenacity and initiative with regard to high effort level (Daft, 2008, p. 38).

The leadership motivation trait, on its part, emphasizes the need for leaders to possess a strong desire that can effectively influence the actions and thoughts of others.

Honesty and integrity must be present for the leaders and their followers to build a formidable foundation of trust between them (Derue et al., 2011, p. 7).

Great Person Theory

This theory came into existence in the early 1900s as early researchers on leadership attempted to study the concept. In particular, this school of thought focused on establishing inherent characteristics and qualities that leaders possessed.

It considered various leaders who existed at the time in society, including social, military, and political leaders.

The trait theory, however, has witnessed a shift in its general perspective, with researchers concentrating mainly on traits that interacted with the situational demands that leaders faced in the period between 1930 and 1950s (Great Person Theory Of Leadership, 2010, n.p.).

The perspective shifted to personality and behaviours between the 1970s and the early 1990s, with the main focus being on the revival of the significant role of traits with regard to leadership effectiveness.

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of Leadership in Business and Its Advantages specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Five Factor Personality Model

This theory identifies five personality factors that it describes as crucial for any leader. They include neuroticism, extraversion, and openness, in addition to agreeableness and conscientiousness.

An effective leader must exhibit strong extraversion qualities, which imply being highly sociable and assertive.

The next important personality characteristic that a leader has to exhibit is conscientiousness, which means being thorough in one’s performance and roles and exhibiting high levels of organisation, dependability, and decisiveness.

Strengths and Criticisms of the Traits Theory

The trait approach makes it easy to determine effective leaders from ineffective leaders. It is possible for a recruiting firm to identify a leader from amongst many applicants through interviews that specifically evaluate one’s traits.

Additionally, managers can use this approach to establish their exact stand and determine their strengths and weaknesses. However, this approach fails to fix an ultimate list enumerating the most significant leadership traits.

Equally, the trait approach does not consider particular situations when determining the characteristics of an effective leader.

The Skill Approach

The skills approach considers the specific abilities, as well as knowledge that an individual possesses. Particular skills have been noted as being significant in determining remarkable leadership capabilities in individuals (Lussie, 2012, p. 338).

The skills approach mainly concentrates on the leader as the main rationale of its discussion, while basing its arguments on the abilities and skills that can make one emerge as a successful leader (Mackenzie,

[supanova_question]

A Financial Analysis of 3D Systems Report writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Macro drivers

Evaluation of the industry

Financial data

Sales and margin analysis

Capital allocation

Conclusion

References

Introduction A review of the financial report of 3D systems reveals that its current market is quite unpromising. In 2012, the market worth was $2.2 billion across the world. The value increased by 29% from the previous year.

The massive movement from the production of prototypes to the production of finished goods resulted in the 29% increase.

For instance, in 2012, over 25% of the market produced finished products and not prototypes. Further, there has been continuous improvement in the quality of products in the market of 3D printing (General Electric 2013).

Macro drivers There exist a number of macro drivers that have contributed to the robust growth of the 3D systems. The first growth driver is that there are new market opportunities across the world. Also, studies show that the products of the company can easily penetrate the market.

The approximated penetration level of additive manufacturing is 8%. This implies that the market that can still be reached is worth about $21.4 billion.

Further, the new market opportunities relate to several industries, such as power and water, aerospace, automotive, consumer, and health care (MIT Technology Review 2013). Thus, the market for 3D systems is quite expansive.

The second driver for growth is research and development. The ability of materials of a 3D printer has a significant impact on the market for the 3D system. A recent research was carried out to find out the growth rate of research and development investment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the research, patents were used as a proxy for research and development investment. The research showed that the patents issued and patent applications filed had grown tremendously between the period 2001 and 2012.

Further, the research showed that the investment on research and development concentrated on material because it is the key driver for growth. It is estimated that investment in research and development resulted in an increase in the amount of sales by about 8% in 2012.

The third driver is affordability. A decline in price of AM systems and development of agencies for direct production of parts have made the 3D system affordable. A recent research carried out between 2003 and 2012 shows that there was up to 95% decline in cost.

In addition, there is tremendous increase in the variety of the product. The manufacturers offer different products that have different prices and features. This gives consumers a variety to choose from. The final driver is the support from the government.

For instance, in the United States, the Congress is yet to authorize an investment worth $1 billion in the field of additive manufacturing.

Further, several institutions such as companies, universities, community colleges, and non-profit organizations are also carrying out extensive research on thed 3D systems (Thomson Reuters 2013). This has a positive impact on the growth and development of the product in the market.

Evaluation of the industry The additive manufacturing industry in the US is made up of three main players, these are DDD, XONE, and SSYS. As mentioned above, the market is worth about $2.2 billion (The Economist Newspaper Limited 2013). The consumers of the products are listed in the table below.

We will write a custom Report on A Financial Analysis of 3D Systems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More End markets Proportion Consumer products and electronics 22% Motor vehicles 19% Medical / dental 16% Industrial business machines 13% Aerospace 10% Academic institutions 7% Government / military 5% Architecture 4% Others 4% The industry receives the highest amount of revenue from consumer products and electronics and is followed by motor vehicles and medical uses markets. The proportion of revenue can be illustrated in a pie chart as shown below.

Geographically, the United States is the largest market for 3D systems. It has a share of 38% globally. The table presented below shows the market the share of the 3D installation across the world. The data relate to the period between 1988 and 2012.

Region Market share US 38.0% Europe 15.1% Japan 9.7% Germany 9.4% Cina 8.7% Others 15.3% Korea 2.3% Taiwan 1.5% The proportion of the market share can be presented in a pie chart as illustrated below.

The US market is the largest followed by European and Japanese ones. However, it is anticipated that the Asian market would grow by a large margin in the near future. The industry practices patent protection of the entire system. This element is important for growth of sales and profit.

Financial data As mentioned in the section above, the 3D market is made up of three main players, which are DDD, XONE, and SSYS.

The financial information about the 3D systems is also presented separately for each of the three players. However, the financial data analysis will focus on the 3D system. Various aspects of the financial data of the entity will be analyzed. Some of the aspects are discussed below.

Sales and margin analysis The amount of sales and gross profit margin are expected to grow in the coming years. The expected sales for the year ended 2013 amount to $509.8 million while the gross profit margin equals to $270.7 million. In terms of percentage, the gross profit margin is 53.1%.

The sales revenue grew by 44% in 2011, 53% in 2012 and it is expected to raise further by 46%. Moreover, after 2013, the amount of sales is expected to be less than 30%.

Not sure if you can write a paper on A Financial Analysis of 3D Systems by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This can be a sign that the growth of sale will stabilize in the market after 2015. The quarterly EBITA margin in 2012 ranged between 21.8% and 24.8% (Collier 2009). In 2013, the margin is expected to range between 22.8% and 31.4%.

Capital allocation The EBITDA as a percentage of sales increased from 23% in 2011 to 26% in 2012. The ratio is expected to increase further to 29%. Further, the operating cash flow increased from $32 million in 2011 to $48 million in 2012. The value is expected to increase to $79 million in 2013.

It can be observed that the company has a high amount of operating cash flow. This can be attributed to the decline in the amount of gross debt. In the fourth quarter of 2011, the amount of gross debt was $139 million.

The value declined to $32 million in the second quarter of 2013. Further, the value of goodwill as a percentage of total assets increased from 37% in 2008 to 46% in 2012. The growth in the goodwill was a result of a significant increase in the number of mergers and acquisitions.

The company spends a cash balance that is in excess of 20% of sales on merger and acquisition (Atrill 2009). A total number of acquisitions that the company has made since 2009 are 33.

Conclusion The future of the company looks attractive. However, the company faces competition from its rivals. This can negatively impact on the growth prospects. Also, the company may be challenged with a risk of losing its competitive advantage because of a rapid change in technology.

Many acquisitions may negatively impact on the profitability of the company when they are not properly integrated. The management of the company needs to check the impact of the risk factors on the future performance of the company. This will ensure that the projected results are achieved.

References Atrill, P 2009, Financial management for decision makers, Financial Times Prentice Hall, New York.

Collier, P 2009, Accounting for managers, John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Operations and Supply Chain Management Report college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction The aim of the paper is to understand supply chain management (SCM) and operations management (OM) as strategies to gain sustainable competitive advantage. A brief review of the two is conducted ton SCM and OM literature.

Then, two case studies – 1) supply chain strategy of Wal-Mart and 2) operations strategy of Toyota are presented in the paper.

The last part presents a theoretical understanding, with examples, and shows how supply chain and operations strategies can become competitive advantage for companies. The paper also presents the difference between SCM and OM.

Literature Review Supply Chain Management

Supply chain management is the sequence in which different stages of a process, to fulfill customer need of a product, is satisfied. Metzner, DeWitt, Keebler, Min, Nix, Smith and Zacharia defined supply chain as “a set of three or more entities (organizations or individuals) directly involved in the upstream and downstream flows of products, services, finances, and/or information from a source to a customer.”

The supply chain process is divided into five stages: supplier, manufacturer, distributor, retailer, and customer. In essence, the process of placing an order by the customer and the various stages that occur to deliver that product is exhibited in the supply chain.

This helps in streamlining the process of supply of the product from manufacturing to the customer and enhances distribution performance. Chopra and Meindl showed two basic types of supply chain based on the way processes are formed – cycle view and push/pull view.

The cycle view of the supply chain points out that the five different stages of the supply chain operate in a cyclical manner.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The push/pull view the supply chain with the pull process execution of the supply chain is initiated with the customer order while in case of the push process it is initiated in anticipation of the customer order .

The main advantage of an integrated system where the supply and the demand side are integrated to form a seamless process helps in monitoring and planning the operational process.

This is mutually beneficial for all the stakeholders as the risks and benefits are mutually shared. It enhances coordination among the supply chain members and increases transparency of the distribution process.

A proper supply chain management helps businesses to gain competitive advantage. Competitive advantages are the needs of the customers, relative to its competitors, that an organization aims to provide through its product and/or service offerings.

Organizations can gain strategic fit between their SCM strategy and competitive strategy by three methods –

understanding their SCM risks and their customers,

ascertaining the SCM competencies,

realizing strategic fit.

Power conducted a literature review to understand the SCM practices from a strategic viewpoint. The study demonstrated that it is important to undertake a holistic view of the participation and interaction of the participants of the supply chain.

Operations Management

Operations management is the process of designing and planning the products, processes, and supply chain. It entails undertaking proper planning to acquire, design, and plan resources to carry out a function.

We will write a custom Report on Operations and Supply Chain Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Operations management (OM) is “a set of activities that create value in form goods and services by transforming inputs into outputs” . Leseure pointed out that operations management is essential for the performance of an organization.

Traditionally, the internal performance of an organization’s operations ahs been designed under cost, quality, delivery, speed, and flexibility. The literature on OM is replete with the debate over the importance of operations as a strategy to gain sustainable competitive advantage for a firm.

Bettley, Mayle and Tantoush points out that many researchers (like Michael Porter) have pointed out that an operations strategy is not enough to attain sustainable competitive advantage as operations can be emulated.

Researchers and practitioners have put stress on resource-based approach and they believe only a few “good” companies can sustain competitive advantage using operations strategy . Hayes and Upton emphasizes that the role of operations is much larger than just formulation of strategy.

Further, it helps the companies to position their product. The main question asked by customers while purchasing a product is ‘why should I buy it’.

Operations strategy helps the companies formulate a position for the product based on which the company streamlines the whole of its functioning. Thus, a positioning strategy helps the company identify how it would like to be differentiated in its chosen market from its competitors.

Therefore, by positioning the product better than the competitors and in accordance to the needs of the consumers a company can gain competitive advantage in a market.

Another method of gaining competitive advantage for a company is by executing the existing strategies better than their competitors implement.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Operations and Supply Chain Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For instance, shifting the place of production to a low-cost location may be a good decision in the short-run but to make it a sustainable advantage companies have to be very efficient to continue the strategy sustainable for long-term.

For instance, as a retaliation to Wal-Mart’s strategy to computerize its product procurement and inventory control system, Kmart failed to realize that sampling emulating the act will solve its problems. Soon Kmart realized that their employees were not trained to operate the systems.

Difference between SCM and OM Often SCM and OM are confused and used interchangeably.

However, both are completely different. SCM is the process of sharing resource information and planning logistic right from the point of procurement of raw material, to manufacturing, and then distributing it, until the product reaches the consumers.

On the other hand, OM is the process of planning and managing the resources required for the production and delivery of the product to the consumers.

In a way, SCM is a subset of OM for the latter is concerned with the production process apart from the delivery and distribution. More importantly, the difference between the two can be further delineated as follows:

SCM aims to reduce inefficiencies in the complete chain of processes from supply of raw material to delivery to the customer. On the other hand, OM has a broader range of activities in monitoring and planning the wider set of operations regarding the manufacturing of the product.

SCM deals with monitoring the raw material required for the production and ensuring that the right material is being delivered for production. OM deal with all that is necessary for the actual production process.

SCM is based on activities irrespective of the nature of the business while OM is concerned with the business the operations are being conducted.

More broadly, SCM is mostly concerned with the activities that occur outside the organization’s premises such as shipping, warehouses, distribution, while OM is concerned with the activities occurring inside the premises.

Though both are different, both are essential in maintaining a sustainable business strategy. Overall, it can be pointed out that SCM is a part of the OM. SCM looks into the operational logistics while OM looks into the overall picture of the manufacturing of the product.

Cases Supply Chain Strategy of Wal-Mart

Wal-Mart has used supply chain strategy to gain competitive advantage for long time.

The following case study of Wal-Mart’s supply chain will demonstrate that a successful supply chain can reduce cost of product considerably and enable companies to provide product at highly competitive pricing. Wal-Mart is the world’s largest retailer with highest sales per square foot.

Wal-Mart’s success from a regional discount retailer to an international discount retailer has been mostly due to their efficient supply chain management.

Wal-Mart has assumed a successful leadership position in the global retail market mostly due to efficient management of its supply chain.

The supply chain strategy of Wal-Mart is based on four factors: vendor management, distribution channel management, technology, and integration all the processes.

Wal-Mart’s strategy has been to procure their products at lowest possible cost. Figure 1 below shows the supply chain strategy of Wal-Mart. Wal-Mart sources its products from different vendors worldwide and procures the products at cheapest possible cost.

This helps them to sell their products at the lowest possible prices. These products are then sent to the different warehouses at different places, and since then all the products are sent to the retail outlets according to the demand of each retail store.

Wal-Mart follows a push, supply chain strategy wherein the products are first sourced based on an anticipated demand from the customers. In case of Wal-Mart the main issue is sources the large quantity demand and at different places. Further,

Figure 1: Supply Chain Strategy of Wal-Mart

Procurement

The first section to consider in Wal-Mart’s supply chain is their suppliers or vendors. For instance, Wal-Mart had problems with P

[supanova_question]

Digital Marketing and Social Media Strategy Report (Assessment) essay help online free

Digital Marketing The internet offers a wide range of communication tools that ride on the social dimension of the online experience.

The communicative power of the internet has essentially replaced many of the traditional tools particularly in the world of traditional advertising in print and broadcast media (Cone 2011).

Marketing a product via a website requires different strategies ensuring that clients get products within reasonable satisfaction level.

Properly designed online marketing and product distribution management facilitate the success and sustainability in online marketing since it operates within stipulated business laws (Cheverton 2004).

In order to increase credibility and maintain professionalism, the current channels often encompass processes and features that flawlessly facilitate a healthy and lifetime relationships between a business and its clients as seen in the platform of Amazon online marketing giants.

The new development elements that will be incorporated in the tour website include trust, reliability, distribution, fair retribution process, and passing accurate information to target audience (Blythe 2006).

This paper explores the ideal modifications on the tour website to improve on online marketing of tours services in the Spain. The online marketing initiative aims at increasing the number of Europeans using the tourism products in Spain.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Objectives and Goals

The main objective and goal of this digital marketing plan is to attract the European market through the tourism website and sell tour packages to tourists who have plans of visiting the islands in Mallorca, Spain.

The package promises a guide to the best entertainment, cultural and social activities besides showing the actual position and themes of the parks in Spain.

The tour website has an existing market distribution channel in the tourism industry of Italy. Apparently, this segment forms the largest bracket of tourism travels to Spain.

Through branding and increasing website visibility, this market segment is projected to increase their use of the touring website.

Since the target market is specific, the success variable for the market share expansion strategy will be measured through an increase in sales of its current output (Dagnino

[supanova_question]

Affirmative Action be Continued but with Changes Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Initiated in the 1960s, the affirmative action is a collection of steps that defines the federal agenda developed to counteract the historic discrimination against certain minority groups such as women and ethic groups in the United States (Dye, 2005).

The government, pressurized by the impact of mass opinions against discriminations of the minority groups, sought to make affirmative action a national agenda under legislations.

In 1964, the congress passed the historic Civil Rights Act with an aim of eliminating discrimination against the minority groups. It created equal opportunity for these groups to participate in the national, state and local levels.

In 1965, President Lyndon Johnson, issued the Executive Order 11246, which sought to cement the goals and objectives of the affirmative action agenda. According to various authors, this order is the foundation of the affirmative action programs in the modern times.

However, affirmative action has become a highly controversial issue, especially due to its long-term effects (Dye, 2005).

For instance, the long-term outcomes of the initiatives are analyzed by looking at the difference between the people who benefited from the program in 1970s and 1980s and their colleagues from the majority groups.

In essence, there are several issues demonstrating that affirmative action has yielded better results. For example, it has reduced the degree of discrimination by providing the minorities with equal opportunities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nevertheless, the initiative has equally produced negative results, affecting both the beneficiaries and the majority groups (Wu, 2010). Moreover, the modern and future context of discrimination has changed significantly, with other minority groups emerging.

The groups considered as minorities in 1960s have slowly but progressively become more of majorities than minorities. Therefore, it is necessary that the programs be maintained but undergoes various changes to fit the modern context of minority groups and discrimination.

First, one needs to determine the benefits of the affirmative action programs in the last four decades. Consider, for instance, the positive outcomes of the programs only a few years after the initiation of affirmative action plans.

According to Wu (2010), the blacks, women and other minorities felt that they had achieved at least some freedom from discrimination within ten years of affirmative action. Public opinion has also shown that the minorities are able to enjoy their rights, thanks to the impact of affirmative action.

For example, a 1999 study by Newsweek reported that both whites and blacks say that affirmative action has improved the lives and conditions of the black people (Sander

[supanova_question]

Safety officer Essay college essay help near me

The Incident Safety Officer (ISO) is a senior member of the “Command Team”. This person works directly under and with the incident commander (IC) to help manage the risks that our members take at emergencies. A timeless truth is that we must keep our members safe in order to effectively deliver customer service (i.e.: patient care, rescue efforts, fire suppression, etc.)

The notion of a command team indicates that there is a shared responsibility for the proper and safe performance of our troops. The fact is that one of the roles that the ISO needs to play is that of challenging and confirming the incident commander’s actions. This article will address this concept as well as describe just what a safety officer must do to be successful at this most critical role.

Discuss the role and responsibilities of an incident scene safety officer. Can anyone become the incident safety officer on scene?

[supanova_question]

Lush Company Report college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Key differentiation/positioning for Lush Company

Why the differentiation/positioning has been successful

Marketing theory applied in the discussion

Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning

Reference List

Introduction Lush Company is a retail store that is based in the United Kingdom. The company was started in 1994 by a husband and his wife whose names were Mark Constantine and Mo Constantine respectively.

Its first store was named Cosmetic House and was opened in Poole. The company sells beauty products such as gels, soaps, shampoos, and hair conditioners.

The company has positioned itself in the market such that it has been able to take a strategic competitive position. Lush has adopted a competitive strategy theory that highly favours it.

This article will analyse the strategy used by the company, its positioning, as well as its market segmentation.

Key differentiation/positioning for Lush Company Differentiation is a strategy that has the ability to give business organizations a competitive advantage ahead of their rivals. It helps an organization position itself well over others in terms of competition (Jobber, 2012).

Lush Company has been able to position itself ahead of its rivals due to its differentiation strategy. The company produces all its beauty products using vegetation and fruits. Lush uses honey, flowers, synthetic oils, essential oils, as well as bee wax in its production.

It does not use animal fats, neither does it perform animal testing unless in the case of volunteers. This method of production defines its differentiation. Most beauty products, especially gels and oils, are produced using animal fats. There are people who do not like products made from animal fats.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, production using animal fats is relatively expensive compared to vegetarian recipes.

The difference is because at times an animal has to be slaughtered for the fat to be accessed, meaning that the company has to buy the animals that are quite expensive compared to plants. This helps in profit maximization by lowering the cost of production.

Differentiation is all about doing things in a different way from others (Heacox, 2009). Lush Company produces its products using different ingredients from most of its competitors.

The world is turning to herbal products, thus any company producing herbal products is better positioned for the current and future market competition. The positioning of Lush Company has been excellent. The company has been able to open over 800 store outlets across 51 countries.

This has helped the company to expand its consumer base and boost its competitive position. Further, the company is well positioned to face the future marketing challenges by producing products whose demand is likely to increase significantly in the future.

The company has offered exceptional services to the beauty industry to an extent that it was awarded The Most Excellent Order of the British Empire (OBE) in the year 2010.

This is an award given by the Queen to an individual or an organization that has exhibited exceptional services that are seen to bring a positive influence or change in the society. The award further strengthened the company’s positioning in the market.

We will write a custom Report on Lush Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Why the differentiation/positioning has been successful It is possible for a company to produce differentiated goods or services, yet fail to achieve much success (Wormeli, 2007). However, the differentiation in the case of Lush Company has been effective to the extent that it has given the company great success in its marketing.

One of the major reasons why this differentiation has been successful is its use of herbs in its production processes. As mentioned earlier, many people prefer herbal products. This has been an advantage to Lush Company. Lush is an advocate of animal rights.

This has further helped it strengthen its position. The company has been involved in campaigns that advocate for animal rights and fund groups that are engaged in such campaigns.

Another factor that has strengthened its position is the many outlets that it has opened across nations. This helps the company expand its consumer base, increase its sales, and increase its profitability.

Marketing theory applied in the discussion The marketing theory that is applicable in Lush Company’s analysis is the Porter’s generic strategy. This is the strategy that entails differentiation, cost leadership, and focus. The company’s success has been mostly due to its differentiation strategy.

Lush has been able to produce its beauty products in a different way from most of its rivals. Production using vegetarian recipe has been vital to its differentiation strategy (Eldring, 2009).

It is important to note that herbal products are said to be of more value in terms of nutrition compared to animal products. This is a factor that has led to many people preferring the products produced by Lush Company.

Most of the herbal products have a medicinal value, thus they usually affect the skin positively. The products help in addressing some of the skin problems. They also have a better impact on hair growth compared to animal products.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Lush Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More On cost leadership, the Lush Company’s products are well positioned compared to most competing products because plant ingredients are cheaper compared to animal ingredients (Kossowski, 2007).

This lowers the cost of production for the company and the price charged to consumers for the products. Consumers are always willing to pay less and get quality products. Lush fulfils this consumer want and increases their satisfaction in terms of cost.

Finally, focus strategy is also applicable in the marketing of products made by Lush Company. Most cosmetic products are targeted to the ladies. The company, therefore, focuses on females for the sale of its products.

Females buy cosmetics more compared to men, giving the company a competitive advantage. In addition, Lush products can be sold to people with high income, middle income, as well as low income earners.

Segmentation, Targeting and Positioning Lush Company sells its products mostly to the ladies. It has segmented its market depending on gender and income level. The company has products that are affordable to all income level earners. In addition, it has products for both men and women.

Therefore, market segmentation for Lush Company is based on the level of income for customers, on top of gender. The company targets women mostly since they are the majority buyers of cosmetic products.

Therefore, its major target market is ladies, although it also has products for men in addition to those of women.

Finally, the positioning of the company in the market has been excellent. It is imperative to note that the beauty industry has many players in the market, thus it is highly competitive.

It is, therefore, important for the Lush Company to ensure that it positions itself strategically to win the competition battle. The company has been able to establish a strong position in the market based on its differentiation strategy and its cost leadership (West, Ford,

[supanova_question]

Iran and Politics – Article Analysis a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Case Study

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The Islamic republic of Iran is not a theocracy. Majority of the country’s population is Islam. For a long period, since the Islamic revolution the country was under the rule of Islam fundamentalists.

However, it was during this period that the country experienced the worst political and civil problems. The Islamic majority imposed a theocratic constitution on the secular Iranians, the mild Muslims, and others.

It is also true that at any one time, a fundamentalist Muslim will be at the helm of the political life in Iran owing to their huge demographic numbers. Majority of them will be Islamic leaders leading based on pure principles of Islam including mujahedeen teachings.

The majority may tailor the constitution to theocratic ways. However, these things do not reflect on the entire population of Iran. This paper will use the case study to lay bare more facts that support the view that Iran is not theocratic.

Case Study Chehabi (78) discuses politics and religion of Iran in a journal article published in 1991. He brings about historical facts that constantly paint religion and politics of Iran as the same thing. In most cases, religion takes precedence over politics and affects the political life of Iran.

Although Iran as a nation has historically been led by clerics, the author constantly features historical junctures at which religion clashes with politics leading to rife and unrests.

Since 1906 when Iran faced a constitutional revolution, there had been attempts to impose church to the Iranians. The battle was won in 1906 by secularism. Until 1940’s dictatorship that had no any connection to the church.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The leader of the dictatorship was captured and probably killed before Iran crawled back to self-rule. However, as Chehabi notes, the church, and active involvement in politics had been banned.

The constitution had been designed in such a way that active participation in both religion and politics was not possible. However, this did not stop many clerics from actively participating in the politics of the day.

The author paints a picture of a situation where the clerics may have wanted to participate actively in politics but could not owing to the previously mentioned rules that sought clear demarcations between church and politics.

Shah was the leader of the political outfit of that time. His political domination stretched to the 1960’s. By this time, shah had liberalized and relaxed most of these rules. The author paints a picture of a leader whose soundness of leadership had deteriorated.

Hence, he allowed formation of opposition mainly a controversial concoction of Islamic fundamentalists whom he had subdued for a long time. Islam had been subdued for quite some time. This had led to pent up anger and resentment at the government.

The long stay in power of forces other than church fundamentalists led to establishment of structures that were in favor of all. Although not entirely popular, the regimes had done a good job establishing an operational Iranian society.

Khomeini had become popular with the clear majority Islam fundamentalists. This led to his installation as a leader of politics in Iran in the late 1979. The author brings about the rise of Khomeini quite well.

We will write a custom Essay on Iran and Politics – Article Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is a journey filled with a sustained belief that the clergy should play a critical and leading role in the day’s politics. He runs away to stay in Iraq where he continues his doctrine of championing for clergymen to lead the Iranian society and politics. He publishes controversial lectures.

The author notes that this was the highest point of what had become Khomeini’s modus operandi since 1940. His message had reached crescendo and finally Iranians, at least a huge number of them, were listening. This formed the basis for the removal of Shah’s monarchy in 1979.

Dubbed the Islamic revolution, this was the beginning of a sustained attempt to install a theocratic society and leadership in Iran. Everything, from constitution to all cabinet positions was painted in clergy colors. However, as the author details, this was the last time that Iran enjoyed peace.

It was during the reign of Khomeini that catastrophic diplomatic errors were made. For example, the Iraq Iran war dragged on for close to three years following Iraq’s attempts to bring some political sanity in Iran. In the same regime, the US embassy was ambushed and its occupants held hostage.

This was a Khomeini’s reaction to any world installation, be it government, nongovernmental organization, or human rights groups. Locally, any voice that tried to sing the doctrine of separating religion from politics was punished.

Khomeini installed a constitution that recognized Islamic religion and its leadership as the only leadership. Effectively, all government departments fell in the hands of clergy. Non-Muslims fled Iran. Secular Muslims converted to Islam in droves.

The society was quickly becoming an Islamic nation. Schoolchildren were learning many Islamic teachings. The fact secular Islam and non-Islam were not united exacerbated the entrenchment of an Islamic society in Iran. The Khomeini era started facing trouble after internal wrangles.

The post Khomeini era saw a brand new clerisy take over. This group claimed to represent Islam although they did contrary to their teachings. Well, not entirely contrary but they did not conform to the fundamental core of the structures Khomeini had left behind (Chehabi 80).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Iran and Politics – Article Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion The case study paints a picture where installation of a pure church cum political outfit has faced opposition at every turn.

When they finally took the helm of the government, these clergy installed controversial structures that permeated all government levels, including schools, to instill Islam in society. This was the highest theocracy went in Iran.

It was during the controversial clergy leader’s reign in power- Khomeini. Although Iran has close to 90% of its citizens confessing the Islam religion, part of this huge following could be attributed to structures Khomeini put in place during his era. Of the 90%, not all are fundamental Muslims.

The society may in many occasions elect leaders that are leaning too much toward Islamic fundamentalism. However, this does not make it a theocracy.

Theocracies are purely made of religious outfits. We cannot also say that a country where 90% are Christians, and whose leaders are always Christians, is theocratic. Theocracies have extreme association to teachings of the religion and the fixation sometimes reaches catastrophic levels.

In the case of Iran, the highest theocratic level was registered during Khomeini’s reign.

Subsequent leadership claims to be Islamic and even teaches Islam in schools but a blanket conclusion based on these simple facts that the society is theocratic is erratic. In conclusion, the Islamic Republic of Iran, in my opinion, is not a theocracy.

Works Cited Chehabi, Henry. “Religion and Politics in Iran: How Theocratic is the Islamic Republic?” Religion and Politics 120.3 (1991): 69-91. Print.

[supanova_question]

The Bible among the Myths Essay (Book Review) best essay help

Introduction The Bible among Myths by John N. Oswalt is among the best apologetics of the recent times. The book seeks to debunk the ideas, which secular scholars have been propagating in the recent years, that the Old Testament chapters of the bible are part of the Ancient Near East Mythology.

In essence, what Oswalt does in this book is to show that any arguments linking the Old Testament with the Ancient Near East Mythology are misguided. In so doing, Oswalt endeavors to make it plain to readers that literature from such scholars is misleading.

In a bid to achieve this goal, Oswalt chooses to approach the book from a polemical viewpoint to convey his point.

His introductory argument anchors on the assertion that in the last five decades much has not changed insofar as the content of the Old Testament is concerned, yet the perception of scholars has radically changed in the same duration (Oswalt 2009, 11-12).

Currently, most scholars have lost esteem for the Old Testament, and to them, it is just another Ancient Near East myth. Some scholars consider the Old Testament as ‘remarkably similar’ to Ancient Near East mythical literature associated with other Semitic religions that originated from the Ancient Near East.

Oswalt dispels this assumption by going to great depths to explain what a myth is in a bid to exclude the Old Testament from such definitions.

Oswalt accomplishes this task in the first section of the book, viz. the first five chapters, which explore the Old Testament alongside the Ancient Near Eastern myths to bring out the contrast between the two.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The second section of the book analyses the Old Testament from a historical perspective and eventually concludes that the bible is a historical account to a certain extent.

Chapter 1 The first chapter opens with an assertion that the bible is a key contributor to the Western world’s perception of reality.

The importance attached to the Bible’s contribution in this sense stems from the fact that it greatly influenced ancient Greek philosophy and it continues to influence the perception of the world to date. The influence of the Greek thought on contemporary world perception is explored.

The most illustrious aspects of ancient Greek thought that are inherent in the manner in which we perceive the world today are, according to Oswalt, the notion that human beings live in a universe and not a polyverse (Oswalt 2009, 21).

Oswalt endeavors to show how the Greek pattern of thinking fits in with the biblical perspective of the same. Therefore, he explores the Hebrew perspective of the same issue.

He notes that the Hebrew descendants were monotheists whose principal belief was that there is only one supreme God, who doubles as the creator of the universe.

God revealed himself and his will to humankind, and thus humanity is expected to obey the will and be rewarded or defy it and face punishment.

We will write a custom Book Review on The Bible among the Myths specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The notion of the integration of the Greek philosophy and biblical principles in today’s worldview manifests in the fact that the Greeks believe in the law of non-contradiction, which fits in well with the Jewish idea that God set himself apart from his creation (Oswalt 2009, 25-26).

Oswalt thus notes that logic or rational thinking, which the Greek are credited with as the originators, only came to be after humanity’s acknowledgement of God as the sole creator of the universe.

Oswalt refutes the emerging belief that logic and science can prosper without religion by arguing that the only thing that the two can deliver to humanity is destruction.

He notes that Hiroshima and the Buchenwald concentration camps are the best humanity can achieve through logic and science alone.

Chapter 2 In the second chapter of the book, Oswalt embarks on a mission to set the bible apart from myths by presenting different scholars’ definition of the term and trying to find the definition that suits the bible most.

He starts by pointing out the reductionist viewpoint, which has been assumed by scholars towards the bible since the 1960s. In an attempt to prove that the bible is unique and cannot be equated to Ancient Near Eastern myths, Oswalt examines different definitions of the term ‘myth’.

He carefully examines three definitions of the term and proceeds to show why the bible does not fit with each of the definitions. Specifically, the first definition claims that the most outstanding feature of a myth is the falsity of the narrated occurrence or deity in the narrative (Oswalt 2009, 33).

The distinctive feature of the second definition is that it notes that truth in a myth is relative so that if many people think the myth is true then it is truer than otherwise. In the third definition, events in myths are neither right nor wrong (Oswalt 2009, 38).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Bible among the Myths by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More All the three perspectives of a myth espouse the idea of continuity, which claims that all matter in the universe is the same thing. The example employed in the book to explain this idea is that of a man and a tree being the same thing both physically and spiritually.

The fact that the underlying principle is the idea of continuity behind the myths leads Oswalt to define myth in his own way as ‘continuity’.

Oswalt thus notes, “Myth exists to actualize continuity” (Oswalt 2009, 45). From such a position, he is in a position to explicitly outline the intrinsic characteristics of the Christian and pagan perspectives of the world later in the book.

Chapter 3 The third chapter is dedicated to explaining the philosophy of continuity deeply to give clear concept of its assertions as well as Oswalt’s beliefs insofar as the idea is concerned.

All myths have, at their heart, the concept of continuity in which humanity, nature, and the divine are all part of one another.

There is an interconnectedness, which links the physical, the spiritual, and the divine such that their existence is a circular continuum. Continuity is thus a worldview whose essence is mythical thinking.

Oswalt analyses continuity with the intent of articulating its aspects in relation to religious thought. He notes that continuity, if approached from the perspective of a worldview, has numerous effects.

Chief among the effects is the idea of associating some natural signs with certain phenomena (Oswalt 2009, 50-56) that if a certain sign manifests in nature, it symbolizes the arrival or departure of some phenomena.

As an example, he tries to point the link between floods, plagues, and weather patterns among others with reality. Another good example that shows the effect of continuity is given by the use of magic to manipulate the universe in one way or another.

Oswalt gives several other effects of continuity, and in essence, his argument is that myth is nothing, but a way of looking at reality. He proceeds to delineate definitive features of myths. Among them, all, but a few myths, share the idea that there are numerous gods.

Chapter 4 In this chapter, attention shifts from examining the features of myths to examining the features of the bible. In essence, Oswalt moves from the continuity worldview to give a biblical worldview, which he calls transcendence.

The main idea behind transcendence is that God exists apart from the universe and there is no continuity between the physical and spiritual planes.

According to Oswalt, transcendence manifests in everything that the bible highlights about reality and he explains the distinctive features of the Old Testament such as monotheism, iconoclasm, and the value attached to humankind coupled with the origin of acceptable ethical standards (Oswalt 2009, 64).

A key feature of the bible that emerges from the description is that apart from the bible religion, viz. Christianity, all other religions are polytheistic except Judaism and Islam whose origin is accounted for in the bible.

Thus, the key feature of the Old Testament in this respect is that Yahweh is the one and only God. This feature also applies to the rest of the bible. A different key feature of the bible is that before the universe came to be, God already existed.

Thus, God created anything that exists in the universe out of nothing, which is a distinguishing feature of the bible. Another distinguishing feature of the bible in chapter four is that humanity is held in high esteem unlike in myth where humans are lowly creatures.

This assertion by Oswalt fits in with the idea that man was created in the image of God and he was given authority over all creation. Several other features of the bible are described, but all of them point to the idea that transcendence underpins every distinguishing feature of the bible.

Chapter 5 Oswalt proceeds with his argument on why the bible is not a myth. This pursuit compels him to explore the ethical standards demanded of humanity in an attempt to show that the Ancient Near East and other secular world perceptions.

Therefore, he expounds the concept of ethics from the perspective of the Ancient Near East and other secular worldviews. Oswalt notes that these worldviews held two distinct standards of ethics. Of these two, the first standard delineates how humankind should interact with its own.

Concisely, it defines what is expected of every individual insofar as relating with one another is concerned. The other standard of non-biblical ethics explained how humankind was supposed to relate with numerous gods, which myths claim to exist.

Every god had a particular way in which humanity was supposed to approach him/her and carry out his/her instructions. This aspect sets the bible apart from myth completely because in the bible, God set a single standard of ethics for humanity.

The standards that were expected of humankind when Christianity began are the same standards expected of humanity today because the God of today is the same God that existed even before he created anything (Oswalt 2009, 85-87).

The idea of same ethical standards for all humanity leads Oswalt to compare the similarities that exist between Israelites and non-Israelites.

He outlines a number of areas, which exhibit similarities between the two groups, but he is quick to point out that such similarities are a matter of coincidence.

He does not believe that such similarities were intended to exist between the two groups. His main point as he closes the first section is that the bible’s perspective is unique and distinct from other perspectives and thus it is not a myth.

Chapter 6 The second section of the book begins with this chapter. The gist of Oswalt’s argument in this section is the historicity of the Old Testament. He is keen to note that the widely accepted historical ideology came from the bible.

In a bid to prove this argument, he begins by examining the definition of history. Though there are several definitions, he examines them and coins his own, which he believes is the best.

The theme of his definition is that for a text qualifies as history, it has to focus on human activity in “time and space, exist for the purpose of human self-knowledge, attempt to be an accurate account, and include an attempt to evaluate” (Oswalt 2009, 113).

With this definition in place, he proceeds to examine other ancient pieces of writing. His intention is to point out that the writing may be insightful in giving an idea about ancient culture and other aspects of life, but clearly, they meet the criteria for qualification as history.

The different ancient forms of writing are listed and the purpose for each of them outlined, but all of them are found to fall short of qualifying as history because they distort the true account of events or they unnecessarily focus on particular individuals at the expense of many among other reasons.

Oswalt then proceeds to point out how the bible is different from other forms of ancient writing.

He endeavors to prove that the bible fits into the definition of history he coins because the bible, unlike other forms of ancient writings, depicts humans as fallible characters who have notable flaws inherent in the human nature (Oswalt 2009, 124-127).

He uses the outstanding example of King David who is hailed as the greatest king in the bible, but he committed adultery and murder of a woman’s husband.

Chapter 7 In this section, since the author has already concluded that the bible is history, he sets out to dispel the arguments leveled against the historical nature of the bible.

He notes that some of the issues that have cast doubt on the bible’s historicity include revelations and supernatural events, which were associated with the Israelites. Oswalt proceeds to note that God was keen on ensuring that Israelites recorded true accounts of their experiences.

The main point that comes out here is that the bible points out clearly that God has made everything that is known to humans known via human-historical experience. Oswalt is keen to point out to the reader that the bible is an accurate account of the past.

The idea of accuracy and history features in his definition of history earlier in the book. According to him, accuracy is one of the key yardsticks for determining what is historical and what is not.

Thus, in the case of the bible, God preternaturally manifested his being to the Jews to make sure that whatever they chronicled was a true record of what they had seen and heard.

This aspect, according to Oswalt, qualifies the bible as historical despite the criticisms leveled against it. He is also careful not to touch on biblical passages, which would discredit his argument on the historicity of the bible.

Chapter 8 In chapter eight, Oswalt continues to argue his case about the accuracy of the bible, which makes it historical.

Therefore, chapter seven and chapter eight are somewhat like a single section for they address the problems associated with history in an effort to distance the bible from such problems and prove beyond doubt that it is indeed historical.

Like in the previous chapter, his energy is directed towards proving that the bible is a historically accurate document. With this knowledge, he urges the reader to note that the entire bible is historical because books included therein give accounts of real people and their patterns of life.

An important element of the accounts is that it does not attempt to hide their flaws, which typically picture them as ordinary humans. Oswalt goes a little bit deeper to bring out what the term history really means.

In so doing, he uses the German and Norwegian versions of the term Geschichte and Historie respectively. He shows how the translation of the term into different languages could distort the underlying meaning.

He notes that the German version refers to a narrative while the Norwegian version refers to an actual event (Oswalt 2009, 157).

In concluding this section, Oswalt notes that the bible is historical and that its historical nature cannot be isolated from theology because the essence of theology is history and to crown all these arguments, he quotes Apostle Paul who wrote that faith could not exist if people do not believe in Jesus Christ’s resurrection, which is a historical event.

Chapter 9 This section is the penultimate chapter of the book. Oswalt thus begins to lay the ground for his conclusion. He does this identifying a few scholars who have given alternative viewpoints on the bible.

Among those he identifies are “John Van Seters, Frank Moore Cross, William Dever, and Mark Smith” (Oswalt 2009, 172). What Oswalt does at this point is to debunk the viewpoints of all these scholars by identifying a key idea in their work and pointing out how it is misguided and thus false.

He begins by critiquing Van Seters’ claim that Jewish priests tampered with the bible after the Babylonian exile so that according to this scholar, the bible is not in its originally intended form (Oswalt 2009, 172).

Oswalt refutes this assertion and points out that it is false. He also refutes Cross’ claim that the bible was an epic poem before being changed to what it is today (Oswalt 2009, 175).

In the two instances, Oswalt position is that the bible has never undergone any alteration or changes save for translation into different languages.

Oswalt proceeds to debunk other viewpoints from scholars such as William Dever who firmly believes that the Judaic belief system was similar to the Canaanite belief system, yet the similarities were ignored by scholars thus pitching the Israelite belief system as unique when it actually was not.

Oswalt rejects this perspective as misguided and false, as to him, this kind of literature misleads its readers. Oswalt also rejects Mark Smith’s argument, which claims that the Israelite system of belief traces its roots to the Canaanite polytheistic belief system (Oswalt 2009, 181).

This argument undermines the accounts of the bible, which it records that only one God existed before creation and he created everything that exists in the universe. In essence, it undermines the concept of transcendence as elaborated by Oswalt in chapter four. Thus, it cannot hold as true.

Chapter 10 This chapter is the concluding section of the book whereby Oswalt sums up all his key arguments, which allows him to take a strong stand that the bible is a unique and special writing and is thus not a myth.

The major ideas he conveys are the disparity between the biblical worldview or biblical perception of reality and the secular or non-biblical perceptions of the world.

He is keen to point out that the biblical perspective finds its essence in the concept of transcendence while the non-biblical perspective has its essence in the concept of continuity.

In a bid to make his point on the superiority of the bible over Ancient Near East literature and other non-biblical writings, he points out that the Western world has embraced the worldview of continuity, hence the downturn in morality that is witnessed in its societies.

Here, he further propagates the idea that nothing good can come out of humanity if the influence of God is missing. Therefore, the bible cannot fall within the precepts of the definition of a myth.

Reference Oswalt, John. 2009. The Bible among the myths: Unique revelation or just ancient literature? Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan.

[supanova_question]

Cloud computing Summary Case Study essay help: essay help

Cloud computing has been gaining popularity for the last few decades. In fact, small as well as large organizations have realized the potential of cloud in saving costs of procurement, installation and maintaining data storage systems.

Synchronized sectors, including banking, have realized such benefits in utilizing cloud computing. It is imperative for organizations to make rational decisions before transferring data and information to the cloud.

Despite the variety of advantages, the concept has presented to the end-users, there is also a range of risks associated with data and information security and privacy. However, limited research has been conducted, considering that the concept is relatively new.

This study explores the confidentiality, information integrity, data theft, information loss, data location, data deletion, malicious insiders and account hijacking as well as data segregation.

By utilizing this literature, the researcher aims to propose ways in which privacy and security of data can be guaranteed.

Cloud computing can be regarded as the transfer and storage of data in shared networks. Contemporarily, customers loose personal data and information to malicious individuals.

Thus, this study has been motivated by the increasing use of cloud services that expose data to potential mishandling and disclosure.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The research hence seeks to make appropriate mitigation recommendations against data security and privacy on clouds. In clarifying this study, the risks involved with clouding require further research.

That is, there is a variety of gaps in previous works, as they have not sufficiently addressed data security and privacy. In order to accomplish this, the research method utilized in this research require existing literature on cloud computing.

The researcher’s knowledge of cloud computing was also imperative. Limited knowledge by stakeholders necessitated the analysis of cloud computing unit.

According to literature review, the client organization risks the information and data being exposed by the host’s staff. Electronic Privacy Information Center (EPIC) has addressed such concerns. Cloud computing involves storing data and information on shared networks.

Hence, research questions included whether the concept has been previously threatened. The methodology utilized sought to consider whether existing literature has sufficient information on data security and privacy on clouds or not.

The research found three main cloud-computing platforms namely Software as a Service (SaaS), Platform as a Service (PaaS) and Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS).

The information security concerns that organizations require to address before engaging a cloud-computing provider include confidentiality, information integrity, data theft, information loss, data location, data deletion, malicious insiders, account hijacking and data segregation.

We will write a custom Case Study on Cloud computing Summary specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This research argues that the priority of the customer in utilizing cloud service converts from that of installing and maintaining the equipment to service accessibility, the degree of performance of the cloud, data privacy, information security and data control to save costs.

In view of this, the research recommends that the first step towards ensuring confidentiality, security and privacy of data and information stored in cloud is to ensure that agreements of service include these provisions.

The agreements should also stipulate circumstances that may make the provider to disclose part or full information to third parties, including government authorities as information and data has been disclosed to unauthorized individuals in the past.

The study also argues that cloud hosts have mishandled client information in the past, including Facebook and Google. It then recommends auditing in closing the gaps.

The research is essential theoretically in the sense that it creates a platform for further research. Inherently, it makes practical contributions that should be considered to moderate against data or information privacy and security.

The research concludes that there is dire need for further research into privacy and security issues with regard to cloud computing.

[supanova_question]

Epistemological Nature of the Knowledge and Skills Needed for Real Estate Management Analytical Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Real estate management involves the operational control and responsibility bestowed in an organization or an individual person over some given assets.

A real estate manager needs to apply science, pseudoscience and ideology of the day to day operations so as to achieve their desired goals.

Successful real estate managers require epistemological knowledge relevant to the estate in order to execute their mandate as well as responsibilities successfully. Epistemology is concerned with the nature, sources and limits of knowledge about a particular field.

The managers need to understand the link between empirical, rhetoric and social constructivism in order to be successful. Pseudoscience is usually the rhetorical part of management where the managers depend on their guts to make decisions.

The nature of pseudoscience is untested and is a limited way of gaging things, although it is very important in real estate valuation and development and also when buying new estates on the market (Kvanvig 2008).

Social constructionism applies ideologies that are as a result of the society. It requires the real estate manager to jointly adhere to the social setting of a given society in order to achieve effective communication.

Thus, it implies that one will not communicate elaborately with a given group of people without prior knowledge of their social environment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The ideology also relates to the laws of the state the real estate manager intends to have their property, the manager should at all times ensure they understand the state and county laws that directly affect the real estate business.

Real estate managers apply the concept of ideology to deal directly with tenants who belong to a certain social class and before entering into managerial contracts, real estate managers are required to understand the social setting of the location of the property to be managed. This will adequately prepare the managers on the kind of clients to expect.

Prior knowledge of expected tenants will subsequently help the real estate managers prepare on the best communication methodology to employ in dealing with the same tenants.

Thus, it is important for real estate managers to carry out a thorough scrutiny and assessment of the social setting before finally agreeing to take over as managers of the property in discussion.

Managers who plunge into estate management without prior knowledge end up in constant wrangles with tenants. Sometimes the worst scenario may occur; no tenants at all.

Science is often considered a recipe for finding the ‘truth’ about some the issue of real estate management is a business venture and subsequently involves a huge capital investment.

A real estate developer takes over a dilapidated building and renovates it back to life before finally leasing it out to tenants. All these activities require a critical asset valuation and budget allocation to avoid non-profitable involvements as well as good background knowledge of real estate law.

We will write a custom Essay on Epistemological Nature of the Knowledge and Skills Needed for Real Estate Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Scientific knowledge will help the manager formulate hypotheses and work on them to ascertain the viability of the contract.

For instance, real estate managers dealing with buildings require scientific knowledge on the lifespan of such buildings as well as susceptibility to natural catastrophes like flooding and lightning strikes.

Science knowledge thus helps estate managers to ascertain their willingness to enter certain contracts (Shermer

[supanova_question]

Is Bottled Water Ethical? Report essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Why People Have Embraced Bottled Water

Impact of Bottled Water on the Environment

Ethical Issues Regarding Bottled Water

Organizational Social Responsibility

How to Promote Recycling

Benefits of Recycling

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction The bottled water industry is one that has grown tremendously in the contemporary society, with multinational corporations such as Pepsi, Coke and Nestle earning billions of dollars in the form of returns annually from the sale of water.

Bottled water is simply clean water produced either by reverse osmosis, distillation or de-ionization of regular or tap water. It can be sparkling water, which is basically carbonated water, or glacial water, which is water obtained directly from a glacier.

Natural water on the other hand is obtained from a specific and recommended underground source which is not from the municipal water supply system. Mineral and spring water is from an underground source which contains relatively high amounts of dissolved mineral salts.

There is also artesian water, which is water from a well that bears an underground layer of sand or preferably rocks.

Bottled water has been a source of major debates and research on why citizens would prefer to spend a lot of money in purchasing something that is available for free in the society.

One side of the debaters believes that the selling of bottled water is a practice that is unethical as water is freely available in the environment, and again it leads to unnecessary use of resources in packaging and distributing such water, when it can be easily fetched from the tap.

A study conducted in the United States revealed that citizens of the United States consumed up to 8.45 gallons of water that has been bottled in 2009, an aspect that saw them spend $10.6 billion on the same.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The interesting part was that the citizens paid 1000 more times for bottled water in comparison to the tap water cost, when most the same bottled water had been drawn from the municipal tap water.

It is thus an issue of concern that the public would prefer to embrace a practice that leads to wastage of resources and imposes on them high economic costs, when they can easily obtain the commodity naturally from the environment (Gallagher 2011).

Why People Have Embraced Bottled Water The major drive behind the high consumption of bottled water is the appeal that is created by the packaging used (Gleick 2010). Bottled water companies have embraced various advanced marketing strategies, with the major one being the use of the packaging to attract their consumers.

The bottles used in packaging bottled water to always make the water to appear cooler and healthier than the tap water. However, it is evident that tap water is as safe as bottled water for consumption.

Using blind taste tests, a study was conducted with the aim of differentiating between tap water and bottled water. It was identified from the study that the participants were not able to differentiate between tap water and bottled water through taste.

The study reveals that there is no much difference between these two categories of water. In any case, bottle water is only but a purified version of tap water.

This does not mean that tap water is not clean; the filters are only used to further clean the tap water that is already clean enough for consumption.

We will write a custom Report on Is Bottled Water Ethical? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The incorporation of beautiful images such as those of springs and mountains on the water bottles and further adding of terms such as pure on the pack creates an impression of the extra purity of the bottled water as compared to tap water.

As a result, they are pushed towards preferring bottled water (Bartol et al. 2011, p. 2).

Other forms of impression such as images of pregnant women consuming bottled water have also been developed in the marketing of bottled water, thus further building a perception of the water being healthier among the consumers (Natural Resources Defence Council 2013).

The bottled water companies also develop terms on the packaging which define the origin of water as a place full of purity.

For instance, water may be displayed as originating from the Andes, and an image of a stream emanating from the mountain is added in the package just to emphasize the purity of the water.

This kind of display and the use of special terms to define the origin of water create a healthy impression of the water.

Other companies also develop beautiful advertisements that are used to capture the attention of the consumers and thus to facilitate purchases of bottled water (Saylor, Prokopy

[supanova_question]

Scouts Canada Membership Case Study writing essay help: writing essay help

Table of Contents Case Analysis

Organizational Culture

Change of Management Team

Strategic Management

Case Analysis Since its inception, Scouts Canada enjoyed massive membership as well as support from various institutions. It was among the first organizations to advise people on importance of conserving the environment. It was a vibrant organization which attracted many people especially the youth.

This was depicted by the high number of members who joined throughout the country. Moreover, the organization bragged of having high ethical values which were passed on from generation to generation.

However, the organization dwelled so much on the old methods of operation and was left behind when the wave of change was sweeping through the world. As a result, the membership of the organization started dwindling.

Many people who joined the organization as its members at a young age lost interest mid way and pulled out. Arguably, this was due to programs that were not in the interest of members. Volunteer support which is crucial for the progress of the organization also declined.

The worst scenario occurred when its leaders were accused of sexual abuse. This meant that the organization that was once respected for upholding high discipline among its members lost its glory.

Consequently, to recapture its position in the society and increase its members, Scouts Canada needed to strategize its actions. Some steps had to be taken to salvage the pride of the organization.

Organizational Culture Among the issues that Scouts Canada considered necessary to change was its organizational culture. It should be noted that success of any organization highly depends on the corporate culture of the organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Organizational culture sends a message to the outside world about the organization’s commitment to achieving its vision. For an organization to succeed, all members of the organization must have a common vision which should also be the vision of the organization.

Consequently, all members of the organization should work towards achieving organizational goals and ideas. Similarly, moral as well as ethical code of conduct must be implemented to regulate behavior of the members.

Realizing that organizational culture is important, Scouts Canada decided to make its core visions, values and ideas part of its organizational culture. Each and every member needed to internalize the values of the organization and work towards achieving them.

It should be noted that this approach has several advantages to the organization. To begin with, the organization had been faced with moral issues that tainted its image. Changing organizational culture meant coming up with new moral code of conduct that the members should adhere to.

This will send a message to the public that the organization has changed thus enhancing its public image.

On the same note, the organization had been using the same method of operation over the years. However, needs of the organization were not the same as they had been right after its foundation.

The change in the needs and purposes meant that the visions and ideas of the organization had also changed. This required a change in the organizational culture to achieve them. Most importantly, the environment in which the organization was operating has changed drastically.

We will write a custom Case Study on Scouts Canada Membership specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Probably, sticking to the old organizational culture in the face of many new changes in the society was the reason why many members withdrew from the organization. As a result, changing the organizational culture was inevitable.

Nevertheless, changing the organizational culture has its own disadvantages for any organization. Firstly, there is a possibility of resistance from some members who do not want changes, especially the old members.

These members have been used to the old mode of operation and they view any change as a threat to their status quo. As a result, they are bound to reject the changes thus distracting smooth running of the organization.

Similarly, it is also possible that the change of organizational culture may send wrong information to the public about the organization being unstable. Instead of the organization enhancing its activities, the change may lead to the opposite effects.

Change of Management Team It has been depicted that management of Scouts Canada had been for a long time left for the old people. On the same note, management of the organization was involved in a very shameful scandal of sexual abuse.

This negatively portrayed Scouts Canada as far as ethical and moral codes of conduct were concerned. Many people might have advised their children not to join the organization thinking that they would have been taught bad behaviors.

Moreover, since people may consider the management of the organization as a characteristic of its other members’ behavior, there is a high possibility that many people would assume the sexual abuse claims against the management to reflect the behavior of the whole organization.

Change of management was, therefore, an unavoidable step to save the face of the organization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Scouts Canada Membership by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It should be noted that this step is beneficial in any organization. To begin with, the fact that young people joined the organization and lost interest in it as they grew up sent a message of incompetence among the management team.

There had to be something that the youth did not like in the organization. Additionally, there is no way that the organization will purport to have changed if all the members of management team retain their positions.

Moreover, for an organization that mostly deals with youths, it is important to have young people in management positions. It is important to note that young people are more vibrant and can help in developing new ideas that can propel an organization.

Moreover, since the organization wants to come up with new strategies for its operations in the future, the best idea is to change the management team hiring young energetic people.

Similarly, technological advancements have necessitated the inclusion of young people in management due to their creativity.

Nevertheless, changing the management team may have several drawbacks.

Firstly, there is a possibility of opposition from other managers on whether some of them should be replaced by young employees.

On the same note, there is a possibility of disagreements between the old members and the young members of management. These frictions may affect and even deter some operations of the organization.

Additionally, change in management can reduce the output of the organization because employees may take time to adjust to the new management system. This is due to the fact that new management members may come up with new strategies taking time to be absorbed.

Arguably, change in management should not be regular as this will make members more concerned with the issues of management changes thus reducing their productivity.

Strategic Management Any change in the external environment should be addressed quickly to avoid negative impacts. Scouts Canada was for a long time stagnant as it could not come up with the decision on the change of their strategic plans. Their operating strategies became obsolete and nothing was done about it.

Consequently, the organization was left behind when other organizations were changing. Its marketing strategies had become redundant with time. As a result, achieving the vision of the organization had become a problem.

Implementing strategic management is crucial because it helps in aligning organizational goals to marketing strategies of a firm. Unless marketing strategies are enhanced, the achievement of organizational goals is a daunting task.

Moreover, strategic management is very crucial in enhancing organizational culture. On the same note, strategic management is crucial in ensuring that an organization responds positively to changes in society which are essential for success of any organization.

However, coming up with new strategies does not guarantee success of a firm. While it is expected that new strategies implemented will be effective, there are still chances that the implemented strategy will fail to work. Moreover, it is not obvious how future events will turn out.

As a result, a strategy designed to be in place for two or three years might be redundant in a year or less. On the same note, implementing strategic changes might be expensive for Scouts Canada. This is due to the fact that it is a non-profit making organization.

Additionally, strategic management processes do not usually give results as quickly as people may want them to. As a result, Scouts Canada may take some time before the benefits of implementing strategic management are realized.

Arguably, members of the organization must support the changes being implemented if they want the process of change to be smooth. Nonetheless, every organization has members who do not accept changes and they may hinder the transformation.

[supanova_question]

P custom essay help

Management differs from one organization to another due to the differences in size and income. Multinationals, SMEs, and global organizations have different styles of management since they deal with different cultures, employees, and clients in various areas of investment.

At the global and multinational level, an organization has to adjust to international management standards in order to be successful in business.

Organizations like McDonalds, KFC, and P

[supanova_question]

The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company Report (Assessment) scholarship essay help

Introduction Economic environment is a study area of economic and has a major focus is environmental issues. The central part of economic environment is market failure. Therefore, for effective economic environment, the management of an organization must focus on market success. For instance, marketing strategies must be employed to have effective environmental economics.

An international company has its market spread across countries in the world. Therefore, their market strategies and to the extent environmental economics are not confined in country of origin. This paper analyzes market strategies and environmental economics for Haier Company; an international company dealing with consumer electronics and a number of home appliances.

Background Economic environment of any business largely depends on the kind of strategies that are used in managing competition. Most importantly, these are the strategies that are used by a company to move goods and services closer to the targeted consumers. Therefore, most of the economic environments are usually shaped by marketing strategies that have been put in place.

Additionally, use of well enhanced technologies and carrying out situational researches has been perceived to be viable means of understanding how well to invest productively. For an international organization such as Haier Company, all of the economic environments and marketing strategies must fit within the international demand for goods and services.

Therefore, in analyzing the best forms of marketing strategies, management of competition must be put into consideration. In other words, there can be no successes if companies do not have sufficient competitive niches in the market. In the case of a company such as Haier which has a major focus on electronics, its competitive niche would mainly dwell on large volume of sales compared to its rivals.

The structure of any company must also reflect modernity, and must be strategically instituted to control competition in the marketplace. Haier Company has a hierarchical form of management or organizational structure. At face value, hierarchical form of structure is equated to bureaucratic form of management. As a matter of fact, there are some negative attributes of this kind of management.

However, this company has utilized the latter management style to emerge strong especially during turbulent economic times. For example, the company had an easy way of coming out of the global financial crisis of 2009 which saw a number of companies halt their operations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, this company uses this kind of management structure to control its human resource management, accounting and other factors necessary for effective marketing. Since it is based in China, this company has used the Chinese culture of management of organization, but tries as much to customize its products in targeted markets.

There are several strategies that this company utilizes. Among them, customization of products, brand positioning and positioning of its exports are very critical.

For example, the company studies any new market in the world before moving in. if the company is to open a branch in a country such as America; the first thing is to understand the cultures of people in this part of the world for the purposes of customization. As well, the company cares about its image. For good internationalization, the company has to first come up with an image for each region targeted.

According to Rickets (2003, p. 379), economic environment is vital towards sustenance of a company in any competitive market. It is not always that various factors of economic environment add up to profitability. Some are risks and should be handled with due care.

Therefore, it is important for a company to evaluate its programs on a regular basis and devise factors to be used in developing it (Kayne, 2005, p. 231). This paper discusses important concepts in economic environment using Haier Company as the case study.

Haier Company This is a multinational company dealing with consumer electronics as well as general home appliances. Its history dates back in 1920 although it was formally incepted long before the aforementioned year. Its initial economic activities were supplying refrigerators to the Chinese market where it was based.

It is located in China, Qingdao and some of its products include mobile phones, air conditioners, washing machines, computers, micro ovens, televisions and refrigerators.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company has had a good run since its inception. For example, in 2010, the company was rated to have one of the huge market shares with a 6.1% acceptance in white goods. The company has been turned into government owned by People’s Republic of China.

Company Structure The company has a hierarchical type of organizational structure which has been noted to have brought in high competitive advantages. Most importantly, this company has managed to survive even during the most turbulent environments. According to Yonggui and Hing-Po (2002, pp. 38-50), a hierarchical mode of governance can help to great lengths in managing a company during tough economic times.

The present forms of environmental turbulence require advanced form of management structures, especially the structures that can initiate control mechanism. Hierarchical forms of management are most bureaucratic. However, it is the middle management that is tasked with managing the market matters.

These are like the competitiveness of the company. According to Conklin (2006, p. 310), the hierarchical type of structure is not favored because it is most anti-social.

This company has a simple yet hierarchical structure. The board of directors in this company forms the topmost administrative posts in this company. Then, the company has some sectors that help in giving the company a more administrative impact.

For example, immediately after the board of directors is the business sectors dealing with the washing machines, a business sector dealing with water heaters and a business sector dealing with integrated channels. The company has a world wide spread image. Each of the branches in the world has structures similar to the one at the headquarters and has some administrative independence.

The management is decentralized; however, each of the branches of the company has hierarchical administration that ensures that there are effective control mechanisms. This has helped the company emerge strong in the competitive market, and mostly, in managing some of the turbulent times such as the financial crisis of 2009.

The following represent a typical diagram that suits the organizational structure of the company:

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sull and Wang (2005, p. 107) note that this company has a top down kind of management prioritization. This is where the top management has total control of what is to be done in an organization. Even though it is not compulsory that the management controls everything that happens in the company, there must be information to be relayed to the management.

For example, the middle level administrative officers may come up with an idea. Before it is implemented, the top managers must be informed. It is an effective way to make sure that everything is under tight controls and there are minimal chances of misuse. For example, a company may have problems with its accounting simply because there is democracy in the company.

If the middle level managers are allowed to make decisions haphazardly, it is possible that the company can collapse. On the other hand, putting so much of controls may be counterproductive. Writing about this, Zastrow (2009, p. 84) notes that hierarchical kind of management structure can be equated to bad bureaucracy.

The top most management position filled by board of directors recognizes the critical roles that are played by various sectors in the company. Also the board recognizes that all of the corporate practices have to be sound and efficient operations. Failure to do this would force the company to undertake immediate and stringent measures to sustain it.

The board is the overall manager and makes sure that all parts are well managed. This is most hierarchical and bureaucratic form of control. Zhou (2004, p. 9) notes that most of Chinese companies adopt this kind of structure, and such forms of management in various companies have made the industries not suffer from turbulent times in the world.

Being a Chinese company with its presence in the whole world, it has to adapt to structures used by most companies.

The top management of this company is assisted by various groups and committees. For example, there is the audit committee, the nomination committee, the company’s secretary office and Principal bankers, the stakeholders, independent non executive directors, the non executive directors, and remuneration committee among others. All of these are very important in this company as they help in streamlining management.

For example, the audit committee oversees all forms of transactions especially on irregularities while the remuneration committee looks at the welfare of the employees. There are groups of individuals in the company who are tasked with analyzing the welfare of current and probable customers.

Market construction for Haier Company Market construction is part of strategic management analysis of a company. For Haier Company, strategic management analysis aims at reducing the costs operation and increasing effectiveness of the market. This company uses situational researches to explore on new markets and breaking barriers present in markets.

It has surveillance personnel who detect anything unusual about a particular market and possibilities of success in a new market for advising the top management. The company starts from simple concepts especially on production to large volumes depending on the nature of target markets. However, this company also has a focus on its local markets. Domestically, the company has agents such as specialty shops and inn in inn.

Market concentration for Haier Company This is an economics term which also goes with terms such as seller concentration and industry concentration. Generally, it refers to distributions of goods and services or production within the industry. This is opposed distributions of company production in the market. Haier Company has achieved a lot of market concentration especially with its washing machines.

During inflations and major global crisis, its products continued to exert force in the industry simply because of good management issues. The company utilizes local raw materials to lower its production costs.

Production differentiation and Haier Company Product differentiation refers to process and means of distinguishing an offering or a product from the others. Haier Company offers unique services that are different from other companies. For example, this company has what it calls a three-in-one framework of operation and this is complete with a localization design.

The company uses local employees and financing strategies in creating a global image/brand. The products which carry this brand are unique. However, the greatest uniqueness is in the way it engages and entering of market.

Barriers of entrance and exit for Haier Company Being in the market mean that the image of the company is taken as it is presented. However, entering of the market and establishing the company is a hard thing. This is also the case with exiting the company. This company had to use varying strategies to enter the market, and has had problems exiting.

For example, when this company was establishing its e-business strategy, there were external barriers. They included poor technical infrastructure in China market and unwillingness from targeted customers. At times, this company finds itself in bad situations and wishes to exit but hasn’t been successful due to the image it has already established.

Marketing strategies As noted earlier, marketing strategies are part of the economic environment of any company. According to Paley (2006, p. 324), effective marketing strategies can make a company win a sizeable share of the market competition. In essence, any company in the world, and especially the multinational companies such as Haier Company aim at gaining or going deeper into the market.

Any company should invest a lot in finding out the new means of approaching the market and eventually winning the competition. However, important in this is to understand the existing and possible incomers. For a company such as Haier Company, the managers should look at ways of improving the field of electronics.

Especially, this field of marketing is improving by day, and therefore should make sure that each new strategy employed in the competitive market is known for the purposes of countering competition. The company should also look at ways of managing global issues in regard to marketing.

There are seven major marketing techniques or strategies that have been analyzed to win in the competitive market. Kaynak (1993, p.32) analyzes them as; creation of a selling point, using testimonials, lowering of prices, painting pretty the benefits, creation of some means of attention in getting to the paper headlines, and provision of offers that customers may not resist.

Even though Haier Company cannot use all of them, there are some key strategies in these that have to be applied to remain relevant in the competitive world market. Among others, management of prices, understanding of the customers and clear advertising forms has to be used. However, the company should not use of the strategies blindly.

There should always a proper mechanism to move into the market, especially the new markets. Important in this is carrying out of informative researches that will give the company a benchmark to initiate various marketing strategies.

No particular company can ignore the critical role played by economic environment. Gerber (2007, p.34) defines economic environment as the factors that have direct impacts and effects on the management and marketing of a company.

Such factors and measures include the policies, the systems in the company, the trade cycles, the levels of income in the company, the economic resources, and the wealth of the company and distributions channels (Gerber, 2007, p. 34). There are five major points of economic environments.

These are the economic conditions, the economic legislations, the international economic environment, the economic policies and the economic systems. All of these work towards guiding any company towards sound management plus strategic management of marketing.

Before moving into the market, a company should always invest in understanding various components of economic environment. Among others, the company must understand the Politics, Environment, Society and Technological advancements in the competitive world.

Most importantly, any economic environment must include management of people. People must be integrated in all policies that have to be implemented in the company. This is because all forms of management are done by people and assisted by other factors such as the technology.

The company must also evaluate itself before moving in to the market. According to Wan (2004, p. 293), failure to put in investments for researches before marketing may mean the company may fail to capture key issues in economic environment.

Haier Company and Marketing Strategies As noted in the discussion, Haier Company is one of the companies in the world which have made successes in marketing and in its economic environments. The approach to its marketing is aligned to the definition of the market as an effective plan or arrangement meant to bring two important players in the arrangement namely the seller and the buyer for the purposes of understanding each other.

However, just as it is the case with any other seller, Haier Company seeks to have value for its goods and hoping that the customers would get value of their money from the goods and services.

This company operates under the guise of perfect competition. Firms in such kind of an arrangement or situation checks their prices, improves their technological use and invests a lot in human resource. This company has made to do all of this in one stride; that is, there is high innovation in the company, human resource is well compensated and their prices are fair.

This company has also had strong strategies meant for survival. Companies which do not have survival tactics are caught in between their successes and turbulent times. According to Swanson (2004, p. 33), marketing strategies that are concerned with survival is the name of the game especially in companies in developed nation. 2009 was a year which all companies were faced with turbulent times in terms of finances.

The companies which were not prepared for such problems went down a great deal. However, for companies such as Haier which already had survival strategies management through those turbulent times.

Haier Company and survival strategies: Strategic internationalization In China, the market became competitive, and therefore the profitability of this company went down. It was time to make the company up again in profitability. One strategy to do this was to spread the wings of the company. There was high need to internalize the goods and services. However, the company could not have moved to international market having not thought about it strategically.

What was needed was strategic internationalization or policies that would help the company move out of its base in an effective manner. One way of doing this was to think in global terms but acting locally.

That is, employing the terms of Chinese market but placing them strategically in international markets. The stages the company used to do this was; first to be a defender of its policies, second to be a contender in the international market, and third to use orthodox methods such as dodging.

Positioning in exports The company has placed its goods and services strategically in the international market. This has had positive impacts over the years. The strategy in positioning of its goods has been customizing the goods and services it provides. For example, any kind of innovation in its electronic goods is based on situational research.

The company must first understand what the customers in various positions wants. If customers in East Africa want computers which have power supplies which can accommodate high temperatures, the company would come up with such a measure and try to put the goods in such a market.

Management of market competition

This company is an example of companies which have managed their competition in the market well. As noted earlier, this company engages a market strategically and must follow situation researches before getting into a particular form of competition.

One way of doing this is by analyzing the strengths and weaknesses of a company. According to Rogers (2001, p. 22), any marketing strategy must have analysis of its competition, and this includes looking at the strengths, the weaknesses, opportunities and threats that a company have.

Haier Company and brand image Any company wishing to manage its affairs well in the market must focus on building a strong image for itself. According to Sengupta (2005, p. 75), brand positioning in the market is a good marketing strategy and should never be ignored. In its course of researching for new markets, this company utilizes the marketing personnel to analyze how best the image can fit in the company.

For example, being a Chinese company, it is possible that some markets may not welcome it well. However, this company has a strategy of positioning its brand in any form of markets.

The first thing is to know the likes of the particular customers and then customize the services and goods into that particular market. For example, if Chinese culture is not welcome in America, the first thing is to make a change in culture in the kind of branch to be opened therefore.

Monopoly in production of electronic and home appliances This company has had to wade its way in a concentrated market. However, it managed through some effective strategies. This industry has had monopolies. For example, Indian companies have been known to concentrate in production of electronics and home appliances. The companies control the market, and therefore companies such as Haier have to either employ a tactic to win the competition or else two the line of Indian companies.

Conclusions Economic environment of a company encompasses several elements. Most importantly, the marketing strategies and how to place goods and services in a market is indeed crucial. In order to achieve this, there have to be myriad of strategies in place such as good positioning of goods and services and proper exporting if the company is an international one.

Haier Company is an electronic company which has its base and corporate culture from China. However, this company has managed to penetrate new markets using proper marketing strategies.

The company has managed severally to emerge victorious even during turbulent times such as financial crisis of 2009. This is because it has good management of all factors of production and marketing. The company has a hierarchical structure of management; however, it is successful in all aspects.

References Conklin, D. W. 2006. Cases in the environment of business: International perspectives. California: Sage Publications, Inc.

Gerber, K. 2007. Economic environment. Cape Town: Pearson Education South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

Kaynak, E. 1993. The global business: Four key marketing strategies. New York: The Haworth Press, Inc.

Kayne, S. B. 2005. Pharmacy business management. London: Pharmaceutical Press.

Paley, N. 2006. The manager’s guide to competitive marketing strategies (3rd ed.). London: Thorogood publishers.

Rickets, M. J. 2003. The economics of business enterprise: An introduction to economic organization and the theory of the firm. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited.

Rogers, S. C. 2001. Marketing strategies, tactics, and techniques: A handbook for practitioners. Westport: Greenwood Publishing Group.

Sengupta, S. 2005. Brand positioning: Strategies for competitive advantage. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Sull, D. N

[supanova_question]

Training programs for semiliterate and illiterate populations in Swaziland Qualitative Research Essay essay help: essay help

Health Communication: Training Programs for Semiliterate and Illiterate Populations – Swaziland Case Study Health communication focuses on the solution of health issues through the dissemination of selected messages to communities. Most organisations apply various means to spread health messages including the use of social media and personal interactions with target audiences.

Although communication plays a central role in th the study of health communication as an independent principle, this branch of communication intertwines with other fields of study including strategic planning, sociology, politics, and economics. This paper explores some of the essential elements involved in health communication.

The paper involves the creation of a training program for a group with limited literacy levels by using the Kingdom of Swaziland, in Africa, as a case study. The program centres on the HIV/ AIDS pandemic, which has created a health problem for in Swaziland, thus causing significant effects in the economic and social spheres of the country’s structural arrangements.

Planning a Training Program When planning the execution and successful implementation of a training program for health communication, medical practitioners have to consider several crucial aspects including conducting research, establishing essentials for the program, identifying the participants, and planning the overall management of the program.

Conducting Research When conducting a research, one has to consider the target population for the program to establish the setting of the program, viz. whether formal or informal. It also helps in establishing whether there is a need to apply a multi-faceted approach to the method of dissemination of information.

For instance, one may choose to use social and print media for a large population or seminars at a central location for smaller populations. Swaziland has a population of over a million people and social or print media would thus be appropriate in comparison to seminars.

The culture of the people that make up the target population is also important as it informs the researcher on what language to use and habits that comprise the appropriate mode of interaction with the audience. It also allows the audience to connect with the researcher regarding feedback on the issue of discussion, which in this case is HIV/AIDS (4). For instance, in Swaziland, men possess an air of superiority to women; thus, it would be easier if a male researcher engaged the male audience than a female (4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, the two most common languages in the country are siSwazi and English. Therefore incorporating the use of such languages in the program using translators or people familiar with the languages ensures a wide coverage and proper transmission of the right messages to the population. Consideration of culture also earns the researcher respect and increases the possibility of success for the training program.

The researcher also has to acquaint him/herself with the local laws especially those concerning topics relevant to the program. Laws of health care management, business transactions, and social interactions are relevant in establishing the right form of communication as they affect the mode of transmission of health messages.

For instance, laws on association and assembly govern modes of communication that require people to gather at a central location while laws on freedom of the media govern social media information outlets. For this specific training program, it is also important to assess the type and number of health facilities available for use by the population. Such institutions form an integral part of the program with regard to the practical application of principles taught at the training centres and information spread through media outlets.

The economic state of the country affects the conduct of the program in several ways, and thus it is worth researching on the same. First, the status of the economy determines the level of funding that the program is likely to obtain from the local government and the need to source for capital from outside sources. Secondly, it determines the approach through which to address various issues regarding the program.

For instance, the unemployment rate in Swaziland is significantly high due to low standards of education and high-income disparity between the rich minority and the poor majority in the country.

Therefore, the use of a mode of transmission of information that enables some of the locals to earn an income would be a welcome affair. An example of such a mode of transmission of information is through door-to-door campaigns using local residents for a specific fee a day depending on the number of people who sign up as volunteers or attend seminars.

Establishing Essentials for the Program Training Methods Useful to the Group

There are three basic essentials to running the training program, viz. theoretical training, practical training, and fieldwork and administration of the program. The theoretical training aspect mainly involves the exploration of the issue with the participants at an interpersonal level through seminars, campaign rallies, social media discussions, and counselling sessions for individuals (2).

We will write a custom Essay on Training programs for semiliterate and illiterate populations in Swaziland specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The theoretical training forms the most essential part of the training as it aids in demystifying some myths that surround the topic of HIV/AIDS for the country. For instance, one of the most common myths in some African nations is that having intercourse with virgins cures HIV/AIDS. Another similar myth that might help to explain the spread of the affliction in Swaziland is that HIV/AIDS infections only occur to people who practice ‘immoral sexual behaviour’ such as sex outside marriage.

Therefore, people in marriages shun the use of contraception such as condoms despite the polygamous nature of their relationships. Theoretical training also allows the target audience to voice their concerns regarding the issue, thus enabling trainers to understand the mindset of the audience and the provision of appropriate solutions.

An example of some of the concerns that may arise during theoretical training is the type of diet that a person infected with HIV/AIDS needs in order to remain healthy and reduce his or her vulnerability to other infections. Most people in Swaziland practice subsistence farming, and thus they may want to know the right types of foods to grow depending on their health status.

The practical training aspect involves the application of specific skills and knowledge taught in the theoretical training forums in addressing various issues regarding the subject matter. The audience puts to action information regarding interactions with infected individuals, hygiene measures, and consumption of medication.

Although a large portion of the population in Swaziland suffers from HIV/AIDS infection, stigma remains a major problem, thus hindering access to important information, medication, and help regarding matters relating to the infection. Some people prefer to keep their status a secret for fear of stigmatisation, which results in potential accidental infections especially for individuals in polygamous marriages and unborn children.

Considering that the majority of people, which form the target audience, is semiliterate and others illiterate, it is vital to apply methods with which most of them can associate (1). One such method is provision of demonstrations, using the local language whenever possible. Such demonstrations would entail methods of maintaining proper hygiene, interaction exercises, and consumption of anti-retroviral medication (ARVs).

The program management may also apply overseas assignments and exchange programs in addition to in country training in order to enhance exposure of the trainees to methods other countries use to combat the pandemic. Choosing a few local trainees for such assignments and incorporating them into an in-country training program, as mentors and counsellors, would help the rest of the population to understand that the problem they face is not limited to their territorial boundaries.

The importance of having the population understand the international perspective is that it would reduce the level of stigma with which they treat people with HIV/ AIDS, thus making it possible for such people to seek medical intervention without fear of societal perceptions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Training programs for semiliterate and illiterate populations in Swaziland by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The administration segment of the program involves organisational matters such as recruitment of employees and volunteers, management of finances, formulation of strategies to suit specific situations, and establishment of relevant information for dissemination. Managerial expertise is utterly valuable for the successful execution of all administrative tasks for the department.

Therefore, it might be important to set up an office where all the administrative tasks for the program take place in addition to information distribution points such as lecture halls and testing centres. Central management of the training program is important in ensuring proper coordination of all activities taking place throughout the country regarding the program, especially when such activities occur simultaneously.

Centrality of management also eases division of tasks among the program’s staff. Consideration of adoption of a collaborative style of management is also crucial to the timeframe through which the program accomplishes its goals and the overall success of the program. Collaborative management is a form of management that fosters interaction between the management staff and other parties outside the program mainly to obtain vital information that may add value to the program.

For instance, incorporation of assistance from Swaziland’s ministry of health or health centres across the country would make collection of background information about the spread of the pandemic within the population easier and provide more accuracy than reading about the same in media archives. Consultations with local organisations with similar programs also help in the determination of an effective structure for dissemination of information to the masses.

Program Participants

It is important for the training program’s management to consider the participants that the program involves in order to generate modes of communication that are relevant to each set of participants. This specific program involves healthcare professionals, counsellors, and individuals of different ages living with HIV/AIDS, as well as those who are infection free. Although some messages may work effectively for the entire set of participants, some messages need to target specific sets of participants for greater impact and efficacy.

For instance, messages advocating for abstinence and use of contraception would work well for the entire population as a means of reducing infections within the society. On the other hand, messages concerning the proper consumption of ARVs would fade in relevance for individuals who are infection free. Therefore, setting up separate training sessions and support groups for people living with the infection would work better in spreading the intended message.

Further, communication methods that work with adults would not necessarily be appropriate for teenagers and youths. Adults have more experience with sexual matters as compared to children, and thus they understand issues regarding contraception and safe sexual behaviour better. Children require a sensitive approach when discussing matters of a sexual nature such as sexual abuse and avoidance of sexual situations. Messages targeting such a set of participants need to appeal to their level of cognitive abilities.

The role of health practitioners in the program is to assist in spreading appropriate health messages regarding the subject matter to their patients as they attend to them in various health institutions all over the country. They serve as ambassadors for the program, who spread messages of healthy habits that mitigate the spread of the pandemic.

Counsellors work on a face-to-face basis with most people who seek their services and are thus in a better position to address individuals according to their specific needs. Such participants are assets to the program in terms of data collection on the spread of the pandemic, issues of concern for most of the population, and formulation of effective messages to relay to the public.

They also contribute to the program by spreading health messages on HIV/AIDS to their clients, which are specific to the type of client and his or her needs.

Program Review

Constant review of the program’s success is crucial in establishing elements that do not work and improvement methods of message dissemination and collection of data. Evaluation of personal feedback from participants, financial costs, and achievement of objectives enables the program to stay on track and achieve its goals within the timeline within which the management hopes to run the program.

Reviewing the program also helps the management in dealing with challenges as they arise throughout the duration of the program. Some of the challenges that the program is likely to face is compliance with local culture, language barrier, recruitment of training staff from the local community, and obtaining government funding. It would take some time during the initial stages of the program for the training personnel to deal with these challenges while keeping up with other unforeseeable challenges as the program settles.

Preparatory Research Applicable Research Methods

Ethics describe a particular code of conduct that suits specific circumstances. Research ethics dictate how individuals should behave in the conduct of their research in order to prevent the performance of activities that may result in potential infringement of the rights that other individuals possess under the law. One of the basic rights prone to infringement by research activities is the right to privacy. Every individual has a right to keep certain information about him/herself without the threat of someone else prying, obtaining, and using it for personal gain.

Research involves the publication of information that the researcher obtains and thus publication of information concerning individuals that they consider private would go against the code of ethics and cause reason for legal action. For instance, publication of personal information an interviewee volunteers during an interview would go against research ethics, possibly causing complications that may lead to the nullification of the entire research project.

The preparatory research method of choice for this program is ethnographic in nature, as it involves several modes of data collection in a bid to ensure objectivity and diversity of perspectives. Ethnographic research appeals to the cultural aspect of the target population, personal opinions that different individuals hold regarding HIV/ AIDS, and the diversity of age brackets that people involved in the research fall in. Some of the methods applicable in ethnographic research include interviews, observation, and literature review.

Interviews cover the part of the research that requires personal one-on-one discussions with various individuals in order to collect data relevant to the formulation of the program’s strategic plans.

Interviews are essential in collecting information that the population would not reveal through behavioural observation such as reasons why individuals with HIV/AIDS choose not to seek medical intervention openly. Application of observation in data collection allows the researcher to learn the behavioural patterns of people in their natural environment without interference.

Observation is one of the easiest ways through which training staff new to the region can learn what the community expects them in terms of compliance with culture. Literature review provides an informative study of the background of the problem as well as the community’s methods of addressing the issue in years preceding the establishment of the training program. During the application of the various methods in the conduct of the research, it is critical that the researchers observe research ethics.

Research ethics ensure that researchers do not go beyond their mandate in the expression of their freedoms through acts such as expression of opinions that mount to incitement. This rule mainly applies in interview scenarios where the interviewer and interviewee usually engage in face-to-face conversations. Research code of conduct ensures that the interviewer protects the interviewee’s private information by filtering information that s/he collects before the same is available for public access.

The existence of research ethics assures an individual giving information that his or her private information remains private. The importance of this requirement for the research is that it makes the research process possible by ensuring the availability of valuable information for the enhancement of knowledge of important issues affecting society.

Main Aspects of the Research

Conducting proper research is one of the essential steps that a health practitioner needs to take when creating a training program. Research for the training program requires consideration of several variables for objectivity purposes. The first variable that requires such consideration is the population of the area of focus.

The area of focus in this case is the Kingdom of Swaziland, which is a small state located in southern Africa. Swaziland is a landlocked state capped between the Republic of South Africa and Mozambique. The country’s population matches its size. According to the country’s census statistics in 2020, the population at the time comprises approximately 1.1 million people living within a total area of approximately 17,300 square kilometres (5).

The population determines the type of research that one chooses to apply as well as the right channel through which to send health massages to the population. Both methods have to be effective, efficient, and affordable for the health practitioner conducting the program and the population, which forms the target audience. The second variable in research is the culture of the target population. Culture is an element that displays the uniqueness of different societies.

It connotes the distinctive ways in which people live, represents their experiences, and displays the changes that different environments can have to people’s behavioural patterns. Some of the elements that constitute culture include language, traditions, religion, leadership, technology, and cuisine. Scholars explain that when people live together for a substantial length of time, they develop habits that help in defining who they are. Culture is a versatile concept that changes depending on its interaction with external elements.

The changes usually take the direction of convenience for the existing population as part of the adaptation process that most people experience when there are changes in environment and other factors. When formulating a plan for a training program, it is especially important to award due consideration to the language that most people in the population understand, as it ensures the delivery of the intended message devoid of distortion and ambiguity.

The application of the right language also ensures that the target audience understands the health issue that the message addresses as well as the changes that the health practitioners suggest for adoption. Choosing the right language also fosters easier interaction between the health practitioners developing the program and the population.

Swaziland uses two main languages for communication throughout the population. As most of the country’s inhabitants are native Swazis, the most common language of communication is siSwati. International relations between the country and other nations globally have also necessitated the adoption of a language with a wider global acceptance, thus resulting in the adoption of English as the second major language of communication in the state (5).

The behavioural interaction of the people in the population also plays a vital part in the establishment of a mode of communication that best suits the purpose of the training program. For instance, the stratification of the Swazi society in terms of gender and age results in a division of power into a system whereby men hold a lot of power. The resultant effect is the creation of a chain of command through which people interact and communicate.

Another element of culture that affects the creation of a training program is marriage. Marriage dictates the manner in which men and women interact in most societies and subsequently it affects the spread of HIV/AIDS. Marriages also present various moral, religious, and legal responsibilities. It governs gender roles and establishes status especially in the Swazi society. One of the responsibilities marriages bestow upon individuals in society is reproduction.

The Swazi culture supports women bearing many children as a sign of fertility and as a means of preservation for the population. The cultural support of reproduction has a logical reason bearing in mind that the country has the highest rate for HIV/AIDS prevalence in the world, as the move ensures preservation of the community’s legacy. However, such cultural support for reproduction increases the chances of sexually active individuals contracting sexually transmitted infections and diseases.

Additionally, the society insists on the role of men in reproduction, thus encouraging infidelity even in polygamous relationships. The Swazi believe that the role of men is to impregnate as many women as possible without consideration of raising the children that come from such activities.

As a result, Swaziland struggles with the problem of raising thousands of orphans. In most societies across the world, marriage elevates the social status of individuals by turning them into role models for the younger generations, which is one of the main reasons most individuals feel the pressure to engage in marriage at a young age, in order to earn the respect of the entire community.

Although marriage is a social concept, it also bears legal implications for the individuals in the union. For most societies, such obligations include attendance to debt and providing suitable provisions for children that result from such unions. Further, most societies prescribe to a form of marriage that comprises the union of one man and one woman, an aspect that makes it easy for society to identify individuals that deserve due respect as married couples as well s identification of individuals responsible for the welfare of the children in society.

Swaziland’s culture presents some complications regarding the legal aspect as most of the society engages in polygamy, making it difficult to track family debts and for fathers to take care of their children, hence the orphan situation.

The incorporation of marriages that allow the union of male adults and teenage females further complicates the issue, as it is hard to distinguish children and wives in the female teenage population. It therefore becomes difficult for the society’s institutions of law to intervene where situations require such intervention for the protection of the teenager in question.

Early marriages are a common occurrence in some societies especially in Africa and thus it comes as no surprise that Swaziland also subscribes to the practice. Ordinarily, early marriages occur between two teenagers. However, in some cases they do occur between adults and teenagers.

Swaziland serves as a good example of a country whose traditions foster the latter form of marriages. There are various reasons why teenage females choose to engage in early marriages, the most common of them being pregnancy. In Swaziland, teenage pregnancy is a concept that the society treats with a lot of stigma, resulting in the preference for marriage by teenagers to adult males as a strategy to save face.

Culture forms yet another reason why teenagers resort to marriage at such tender ages. For instance, Swaziland’s culture favours polygamy and detests family planning, hence the high prevalence of HIV/AIDS. Most women in the society consider marriage a privilege, as most men prefer polygamous affairs. Therefore, females in their teenage jump at the opportunity to marry older men just to attain the status of married women.

Men also perceive female teenagers as an avenue to avoid the pandemic as most of them lack sexual experience. As a result, the risk factor for contracting HIV for female teens is higher than it is for males in the same age bracket. The third reason why teenagers choose early marriage is for security, both personal and financial. Personal security refers to the need of the teenagers to have better companionship and prevent harassment from other male members of society.

Demand for teenage brides by adult males for marriages commonly known as ‘Kwendizisa’ has resulted in a culture that supports the occurrence of early marriages by teenage girls. The economic hardships most families face increase attraction of teenagers to marriages as they seek alternative lifestyles in a bid to obtain better lives. However, this is not always the case due to high rates of polygamy as part of the local traditions.

Thirdly, the type and level of education in the country is an important variable as it affects the level of understanding of basic issues concerning the population and the way the population perceives its surrounding environment, within and outside the territorial borders. Most scholars attribute the level of HIV/AIDS prevalence in Swaziland to poor quality education and lack of accessibility to advanced education. The education system covers three levels, viz. the primary level, secondary level, and tertiary level.

The primary level comprises seven individual stages (grades one to seven) in which the first two are government-sponsored, and thus free for every child. Most children join Grade 1 at six years of age while others join later depending on personal cognitive abilities and the families’ financial ability. Although most children get through the basic primary education, only about twenty percent of children get access to secondary education and the number falls below the percentage at the tertiary level.

Most parents prefer to hold their children back to attend to farms. Additionally, most families live on an income of less than two dollars a day, and thus they can only afford to send a single child at a time to school at that level. The government does make an effort to ensure children of school-going age that successfully complete the secondary level obtain tertiary education through government sponsorships.

However, such students only account for a small fraction of the population. Therefore, it is important to consider a means of communication that appeal to the semi-literate population that forms the majority of the population in Swaziland. Use of methods that the community can relate to such as using storytelling to demystify myths about HIV/AIDS has a greater impact than using formal lectures.

The economy of the country is another important aspect for consideration in the preparation of the plan for the training program. The reason for the importance of the economy is that it etches on the practicability of the program rather than the theory. It is important to consider the long-term success of the program in addition to the short-term. The economic situation in the area of operation should be viable enough to achieve the goals the training program sets for achievement.

Most training programs concerning HIV/AIDS explore issues such as the prevention of the spread of infection, outreach campaigns to demystify myths about HIV/AIDS, mitigation measures for infected individuals, and addressing stigma in the society. These elements require different forms of support, some moral, but mostly financial. Swaziland struggles with a slow economy and many important issues in need of government support such as education and creation of employment opportunities.

Therefore, it is important to explore all possible options including foreign sponsorship. Lastly, consideration of the laws applicable on the subject of concern enables the operation of a program without breaking local laws in the process. Such consideration is important as it allows the health practitioner to conduct the training program without interference from law enforcement or hostility from the community.

Research on relevant laws such as laws on marriage, basic rights, and freedoms and the economy aid medical practitioners to avoid giving misguided advice to the population (3). For instance, in Swaziland, the law does not support sexual activities involving teenagers.

In the past, the practice was rampant and tolerable to the community to the point that it became a norm in the society. The government of Swaziland banned such sexual activity by terming the same as an offence, except in the union of marriage. However, in 2012, the Swazi government enacted the Children’s Protection and Welfare Act, which makes any sexual activity involving teenagers regardless of their marital status illegal (6).

The move was part of the government’s efforts to protect children from undue exploitation from adults as well as an avenue to curb the spread of HIV/AIDS within the society. It is also important to consider healthcare laws, especially the government’s strategic plan to curb the menace. This aspect ensures that the training program and the government’s goals run in tandem for the achievement of a common objective, viz. prevention and eradication of HIV/AIDS in the country.

Conclusion The formulation of a training program that takes into account the literacy levels of the population is Swaziland requires careful consideration of several other essential factors including the culture of the region, the size of the population, the economic status of the country, relevant laws, and the education and healthcare systems in the region.

Proper research on these aspects informs the type, amount, and the mode of training that the program will focus on and allow for a review of the program for the successful achievement of the program’s objectives. Incorporation of local residents in the program as part of the training staff and seeking help from healthcare institutions within the area ensures the programs efficacy and compliance with the set timeframe for the accomplishment of proper training.

References Alzougool B, Chang S, Gray M. The nature and constitution of informal careers’ information needs: what you don’t know you need is as important as what you want to know. Information Research. 2013;18(1).

Gold J, Pedrana AE, Stoove MA, et al. Developing health promotion interventions on social networking sites: recommendations from the FaceSpace project. Journal of Medical Internet Research. 2012;14(1):e30.

Green J, Tones K, Cross R, Woodall J. Health promotion: planning and strategies. 3rd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage; 2015. 640 p.

Mak J, Mayhew SH, von Maercke A, et al. Men’s use of sexual health and HIV services in Swaziland: a mixed methods study. Sexual Health. 2016;13:265-274.

Swaziland population 2020 [Internet]. [place unknown: publisher unknown]; [2019 May 12] [cited 2020 Feb 11]

United Nations. Convention on the rights of the child [Internet]. [place unknown: publisher unknown]; [2019 Jul 8] [cited 2020 Feb 11]:[about 25 screens].

[supanova_question]

The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company Report (Assessment) custom essay help

Introduction Economic environment is a study area of economic and has a major focus is environmental issues. The central part of economic environment is market failure. Therefore, for effective economic environment, the management of an organization must focus on market success. For instance, marketing strategies must be employed to have effective environmental economics.

An international company has its market spread across countries in the world. Therefore, their market strategies and to the extent environmental economics are not confined in country of origin. This paper analyzes market strategies and environmental economics for Haier Company; an international company dealing with consumer electronics and a number of home appliances.

Background Economic environment of any business largely depends on the kind of strategies that are used in managing competition. Most importantly, these are the strategies that are used by a company to move goods and services closer to the targeted consumers. Therefore, most of the economic environments are usually shaped by marketing strategies that have been put in place.

Additionally, use of well enhanced technologies and carrying out situational researches has been perceived to be viable means of understanding how well to invest productively. For an international organization such as Haier Company, all of the economic environments and marketing strategies must fit within the international demand for goods and services.

Therefore, in analyzing the best forms of marketing strategies, management of competition must be put into consideration. In other words, there can be no successes if companies do not have sufficient competitive niches in the market. In the case of a company such as Haier which has a major focus on electronics, its competitive niche would mainly dwell on large volume of sales compared to its rivals.

The structure of any company must also reflect modernity, and must be strategically instituted to control competition in the marketplace. Haier Company has a hierarchical form of management or organizational structure. At face value, hierarchical form of structure is equated to bureaucratic form of management. As a matter of fact, there are some negative attributes of this kind of management.

However, this company has utilized the latter management style to emerge strong especially during turbulent economic times. For example, the company had an easy way of coming out of the global financial crisis of 2009 which saw a number of companies halt their operations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, this company uses this kind of management structure to control its human resource management, accounting and other factors necessary for effective marketing. Since it is based in China, this company has used the Chinese culture of management of organization, but tries as much to customize its products in targeted markets.

There are several strategies that this company utilizes. Among them, customization of products, brand positioning and positioning of its exports are very critical.

For example, the company studies any new market in the world before moving in. if the company is to open a branch in a country such as America; the first thing is to understand the cultures of people in this part of the world for the purposes of customization. As well, the company cares about its image. For good internationalization, the company has to first come up with an image for each region targeted.

According to Rickets (2003, p. 379), economic environment is vital towards sustenance of a company in any competitive market. It is not always that various factors of economic environment add up to profitability. Some are risks and should be handled with due care.

Therefore, it is important for a company to evaluate its programs on a regular basis and devise factors to be used in developing it (Kayne, 2005, p. 231). This paper discusses important concepts in economic environment using Haier Company as the case study.

Haier Company This is a multinational company dealing with consumer electronics as well as general home appliances. Its history dates back in 1920 although it was formally incepted long before the aforementioned year. Its initial economic activities were supplying refrigerators to the Chinese market where it was based.

It is located in China, Qingdao and some of its products include mobile phones, air conditioners, washing machines, computers, micro ovens, televisions and refrigerators.

We will write a custom Assessment on The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The company has had a good run since its inception. For example, in 2010, the company was rated to have one of the huge market shares with a 6.1% acceptance in white goods. The company has been turned into government owned by People’s Republic of China.

Company Structure The company has a hierarchical type of organizational structure which has been noted to have brought in high competitive advantages. Most importantly, this company has managed to survive even during the most turbulent environments. According to Yonggui and Hing-Po (2002, pp. 38-50), a hierarchical mode of governance can help to great lengths in managing a company during tough economic times.

The present forms of environmental turbulence require advanced form of management structures, especially the structures that can initiate control mechanism. Hierarchical forms of management are most bureaucratic. However, it is the middle management that is tasked with managing the market matters.

These are like the competitiveness of the company. According to Conklin (2006, p. 310), the hierarchical type of structure is not favored because it is most anti-social.

This company has a simple yet hierarchical structure. The board of directors in this company forms the topmost administrative posts in this company. Then, the company has some sectors that help in giving the company a more administrative impact.

For example, immediately after the board of directors is the business sectors dealing with the washing machines, a business sector dealing with water heaters and a business sector dealing with integrated channels. The company has a world wide spread image. Each of the branches in the world has structures similar to the one at the headquarters and has some administrative independence.

The management is decentralized; however, each of the branches of the company has hierarchical administration that ensures that there are effective control mechanisms. This has helped the company emerge strong in the competitive market, and mostly, in managing some of the turbulent times such as the financial crisis of 2009.

The following represent a typical diagram that suits the organizational structure of the company:

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Economic Environment of Business – Haier Company by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Sull and Wang (2005, p. 107) note that this company has a top down kind of management prioritization. This is where the top management has total control of what is to be done in an organization. Even though it is not compulsory that the management controls everything that happens in the company, there must be information to be relayed to the management.

For example, the middle level administrative officers may come up with an idea. Before it is implemented, the top managers must be informed. It is an effective way to make sure that everything is under tight controls and there are minimal chances of misuse. For example, a company may have problems with its accounting simply because there is democracy in the company.

If the middle level managers are allowed to make decisions haphazardly, it is possible that the company can collapse. On the other hand, putting so much of controls may be counterproductive. Writing about this, Zastrow (2009, p. 84) notes that hierarchical kind of management structure can be equated to bad bureaucracy.

The top most management position filled by board of directors recognizes the critical roles that are played by various sectors in the company. Also the board recognizes that all of the corporate practices have to be sound and efficient operations. Failure to do this would force the company to undertake immediate and stringent measures to sustain it.

The board is the overall manager and makes sure that all parts are well managed. This is most hierarchical and bureaucratic form of control. Zhou (2004, p. 9) notes that most of Chinese companies adopt this kind of structure, and such forms of management in various companies have made the industries not suffer from turbulent times in the world.

Being a Chinese company with its presence in the whole world, it has to adapt to structures used by most companies.

The top management of this company is assisted by various groups and committees. For example, there is the audit committee, the nomination committee, the company’s secretary office and Principal bankers, the stakeholders, independent non executive directors, the non executive directors, and remuneration committee among others. All of these are very important in this company as they help in streamlining management.

For example, the audit committee oversees all forms of transactions especially on irregularities while the remuneration committee looks at the welfare of the employees. There are groups of individuals in the company who are tasked with analyzing the welfare of current and probable customers.

Market construction for Haier Company Market construction is part of strategic management analysis of a company. For Haier Company, strategic management analysis aims at reducing the costs operation and increasing effectiveness of the market. This company uses situational researches to explore on new markets and breaking barriers present in markets.

It has surveillance personnel who detect anything unusual about a particular market and possibilities of success in a new market for advising the top management. The company starts from simple concepts especially on production to large volumes depending on the nature of target markets. However, this company also has a focus on its local markets. Domestically, the company has agents such as specialty shops and inn in inn.

Market concentration for Haier Company This is an economics term which also goes with terms such as seller concentration and industry concentration. Generally, it refers to distributions of goods and services or production within the industry. This is opposed distributions of company production in the market. Haier Company has achieved a lot of market concentration especially with its washing machines.

During inflations and major global crisis, its products continued to exert force in the industry simply because of good management issues. The company utilizes local raw materials to lower its production costs.

Production differentiation and Haier Company Product differentiation refers to process and means of distinguishing an offering or a product from the others. Haier Company offers unique services that are different from other companies. For example, this company has what it calls a three-in-one framework of operation and this is complete with a localization design.

The company uses local employees and financing strategies in creating a global image/brand. The products which carry this brand are unique. However, the greatest uniqueness is in the way it engages and entering of market.

Barriers of entrance and exit for Haier Company Being in the market mean that the image of the company is taken as it is presented. However, entering of the market and establishing the company is a hard thing. This is also the case with exiting the company. This company had to use varying strategies to enter the market, and has had problems exiting.

For example, when this company was establishing its e-business strategy, there were external barriers. They included poor technical infrastructure in China market and unwillingness from targeted customers. At times, this company finds itself in bad situations and wishes to exit but hasn’t been successful due to the image it has already established.

Marketing strategies As noted earlier, marketing strategies are part of the economic environment of any company. According to Paley (2006, p. 324), effective marketing strategies can make a company win a sizeable share of the market competition. In essence, any company in the world, and especially the multinational companies such as Haier Company aim at gaining or going deeper into the market.

Any company should invest a lot in finding out the new means of approaching the market and eventually winning the competition. However, important in this is to understand the existing and possible incomers. For a company such as Haier Company, the managers should look at ways of improving the field of electronics.

Especially, this field of marketing is improving by day, and therefore should make sure that each new strategy employed in the competitive market is known for the purposes of countering competition. The company should also look at ways of managing global issues in regard to marketing.

There are seven major marketing techniques or strategies that have been analyzed to win in the competitive market. Kaynak (1993, p.32) analyzes them as; creation of a selling point, using testimonials, lowering of prices, painting pretty the benefits, creation of some means of attention in getting to the paper headlines, and provision of offers that customers may not resist.

Even though Haier Company cannot use all of them, there are some key strategies in these that have to be applied to remain relevant in the competitive world market. Among others, management of prices, understanding of the customers and clear advertising forms has to be used. However, the company should not use of the strategies blindly.

There should always a proper mechanism to move into the market, especially the new markets. Important in this is carrying out of informative researches that will give the company a benchmark to initiate various marketing strategies.

No particular company can ignore the critical role played by economic environment. Gerber (2007, p.34) defines economic environment as the factors that have direct impacts and effects on the management and marketing of a company.

Such factors and measures include the policies, the systems in the company, the trade cycles, the levels of income in the company, the economic resources, and the wealth of the company and distributions channels (Gerber, 2007, p. 34). There are five major points of economic environments.

These are the economic conditions, the economic legislations, the international economic environment, the economic policies and the economic systems. All of these work towards guiding any company towards sound management plus strategic management of marketing.

Before moving into the market, a company should always invest in understanding various components of economic environment. Among others, the company must understand the Politics, Environment, Society and Technological advancements in the competitive world.

Most importantly, any economic environment must include management of people. People must be integrated in all policies that have to be implemented in the company. This is because all forms of management are done by people and assisted by other factors such as the technology.

The company must also evaluate itself before moving in to the market. According to Wan (2004, p. 293), failure to put in investments for researches before marketing may mean the company may fail to capture key issues in economic environment.

Haier Company and Marketing Strategies As noted in the discussion, Haier Company is one of the companies in the world which have made successes in marketing and in its economic environments. The approach to its marketing is aligned to the definition of the market as an effective plan or arrangement meant to bring two important players in the arrangement namely the seller and the buyer for the purposes of understanding each other.

However, just as it is the case with any other seller, Haier Company seeks to have value for its goods and hoping that the customers would get value of their money from the goods and services.

This company operates under the guise of perfect competition. Firms in such kind of an arrangement or situation checks their prices, improves their technological use and invests a lot in human resource. This company has made to do all of this in one stride; that is, there is high innovation in the company, human resource is well compensated and their prices are fair.

This company has also had strong strategies meant for survival. Companies which do not have survival tactics are caught in between their successes and turbulent times. According to Swanson (2004, p. 33), marketing strategies that are concerned with survival is the name of the game especially in companies in developed nation. 2009 was a year which all companies were faced with turbulent times in terms of finances.

The companies which were not prepared for such problems went down a great deal. However, for companies such as Haier which already had survival strategies management through those turbulent times.

Haier Company and survival strategies: Strategic internationalization In China, the market became competitive, and therefore the profitability of this company went down. It was time to make the company up again in profitability. One strategy to do this was to spread the wings of the company. There was high need to internalize the goods and services. However, the company could not have moved to international market having not thought about it strategically.

What was needed was strategic internationalization or policies that would help the company move out of its base in an effective manner. One way of doing this was to think in global terms but acting locally.

That is, employing the terms of Chinese market but placing them strategically in international markets. The stages the company used to do this was; first to be a defender of its policies, second to be a contender in the international market, and third to use orthodox methods such as dodging.

Positioning in exports The company has placed its goods and services strategically in the international market. This has had positive impacts over the years. The strategy in positioning of its goods has been customizing the goods and services it provides. For example, any kind of innovation in its electronic goods is based on situational research.

The company must first understand what the customers in various positions wants. If customers in East Africa want computers which have power supplies which can accommodate high temperatures, the company would come up with such a measure and try to put the goods in such a market.

Management of market competition

This company is an example of companies which have managed their competition in the market well. As noted earlier, this company engages a market strategically and must follow situation researches before getting into a particular form of competition.

One way of doing this is by analyzing the strengths and weaknesses of a company. According to Rogers (2001, p. 22), any marketing strategy must have analysis of its competition, and this includes looking at the strengths, the weaknesses, opportunities and threats that a company have.

Haier Company and brand image Any company wishing to manage its affairs well in the market must focus on building a strong image for itself. According to Sengupta (2005, p. 75), brand positioning in the market is a good marketing strategy and should never be ignored. In its course of researching for new markets, this company utilizes the marketing personnel to analyze how best the image can fit in the company.

For example, being a Chinese company, it is possible that some markets may not welcome it well. However, this company has a strategy of positioning its brand in any form of markets.

The first thing is to know the likes of the particular customers and then customize the services and goods into that particular market. For example, if Chinese culture is not welcome in America, the first thing is to make a change in culture in the kind of branch to be opened therefore.

Monopoly in production of electronic and home appliances This company has had to wade its way in a concentrated market. However, it managed through some effective strategies. This industry has had monopolies. For example, Indian companies have been known to concentrate in production of electronics and home appliances. The companies control the market, and therefore companies such as Haier have to either employ a tactic to win the competition or else two the line of Indian companies.

Conclusions Economic environment of a company encompasses several elements. Most importantly, the marketing strategies and how to place goods and services in a market is indeed crucial. In order to achieve this, there have to be myriad of strategies in place such as good positioning of goods and services and proper exporting if the company is an international one.

Haier Company is an electronic company which has its base and corporate culture from China. However, this company has managed to penetrate new markets using proper marketing strategies.

The company has managed severally to emerge victorious even during turbulent times such as financial crisis of 2009. This is because it has good management of all factors of production and marketing. The company has a hierarchical structure of management; however, it is successful in all aspects.

References Conklin, D. W. 2006. Cases in the environment of business: International perspectives. California: Sage Publications, Inc.

Gerber, K. 2007. Economic environment. Cape Town: Pearson Education South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

Kaynak, E. 1993. The global business: Four key marketing strategies. New York: The Haworth Press, Inc.

Kayne, S. B. 2005. Pharmacy business management. London: Pharmaceutical Press.

Paley, N. 2006. The manager’s guide to competitive marketing strategies (3rd ed.). London: Thorogood publishers.

Rickets, M. J. 2003. The economics of business enterprise: An introduction to economic organization and the theory of the firm. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing Limited.

Rogers, S. C. 2001. Marketing strategies, tactics, and techniques: A handbook for practitioners. Westport: Greenwood Publishing Group.

Sengupta, S. 2005. Brand positioning: Strategies for competitive advantage. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Sull, D. N

[supanova_question]

Analysis of Hamden Fire Department’s Budget Term Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Budgetary Process: A Brief Overview

Operating with Capital Budgets

Operating with Capital Expenses

Sources of Revenue and Budgetary Allocations

Shortcomings of the Budget Making Process

Recommendations

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Hamden is a county situated in the state of Connecticut (Hamden Economic and Community Development 1). Just like any other county in the United States of America, it has in place several programs that are targeted at providing social and other services to the inhabitants.

The local authority in Hamden is in charge of the provision of a number of services. They include health services, security and other emergency services like fire response.

The author of this paper takes a critical look at the budgetary procedures in the county. In this paper, the author restricts their discussion to the Fire Department in the City of Hamden.

The Fire Department in the city of Hamden has a long history that dates way back to the 1800s (Hamden Fire Department History 1). The organization was founded by the community members in a bid to protect their homes and businesses among other properties.

The community members were interested in protecting their property in the event of a fire. So rudimentary was the formation of the fire department that the community relied on simple materials like buckets.

According to information obtained from Hamden Fire Department’s website, the structure of the entity is fairly complex. As far as organizational structure, the entity is headed by a Fire Chief (Hamden Fire Department Organization Chart 1).

The Fire Chief has one deputy in charge of four other departments. In addition, it is easy to establish, from the organizational structure chart provided, that the department has a total of five fire stations. From the chart, it is clear that organization is a multi-faceted entity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Given this multi-faceted nature of the organization, it is clear that a detailed budget should be put in place to ensure its proper functioning. In this paper, the author looks at one such budget and makes a detailed analysis focusing on several aspects of that document.

More importantly, the budgetary review carried out in this paper looks at the shortcomings of the document and makes recommendations for future improvements.

The Budgetary Process: A Brief Overview Every society, be it a city, state, or a federal government, has a list of items it intends to fulfill as far as provision of services is concerned.

Aronson and Schwartz (23) are of the opinion that every level of governance requires a budget to enable it estimate the spending to be incurred during a given period of time. In other words, budget is more or less a form of financial approximation for a given period of time.

According to the two authors, the budgetary process is the mandate of the office of the leader of a local authority. In this case, the entire process of formulating the budget approximations falls squarely in the office of the Mayor of the city of Hamden.

Consequently, the mayor is expected to factor in all the departments that fall under his jurisdiction in their respective local authority.

In the opinion of Kemp (49), cities should take into account the revenue they collect and the funding they expect from the national government as they prepare their budgets.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Analysis of Hamden Fire Department’s Budget specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, the leadership in such cities should factor in the demand of the various services they offer so as to achieve equitable allocation of resources.

In the case of the city of Hamden, the mayor is expected to take into consideration 35 different categories of departmental structures in their expenditure approximations every year.

The Heads of the various departments in a local authority are expected to hand in estimates of their revenue and expenditure to the person designated to head the finance docket (Kemp 58). Members of the public are also invited to participate in the budget making process (Kemp 58).

Their input is considered after the professional heads of departments have made their recommendations to the mayor. Thereafter, the head of finance is expected to compile the said estimates and hand them over to the mayor.

After receiving the estimates, the mayor is expected to submit them to the legislative arm of the local authority for approval. The budget is expected to run for one fiscal year (Aronson and Schwartz 55). In the case of the city of Hamden, the fiscal year runs from July to June of consecutive years.

Operating with Capital Budgets Aronson and Schwartz (6) argue that a budget per se is a detailed account of the financial plan of an organization. In this case, the organization in reference is the city of Hamden. More specifically, the review focuses on the city’s Fire Department.

The financial plan for such an organization is expected to be subdivided into two categories. The two are the operating and the capital plans (Fulton 1).

The first category of budget is one that takes into account the daily functioning of a particular organization over a period of one year. According to Fulton (1), the person heading such an organization is tasked with the responsibility of reviewing the said plan.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of Hamden Fire Department’s Budget by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The person in charge of the budgetary allocation is to ensure that those authorized to incur expenditure do not divert from the norm.

On their part, capital budgets address the issue of investment. They account for any investment that a given organization intends to make internally (Fulton 1). In the case of the budget discussed in this paper, the Hamden Fire Department may have several investments it seeks to actualize.

As such, the department is required to have an internal way of realizing its goals and objectives. As such, the department will allocate itself a given period of time over which the said investment is to be realized.

The amount of money spent over that period for the said investment is referred to as the capital budget.

Kemp (17) opines that different local authorities have specific periods over which their investments are to be achieved. Further, the author argues that capital budgets run between 5 to 10 years.

Operating with Capital Expenses According to Kennon (1), every organization has a set of expenses which it must incur to meet its diverse objectives. As a result, analysts argue that the funds spent by an organization to enable it fulfill its nominal operations constitute the entity’s operating expenses.

In this regard, one would argue that the operating expenses for Hamden Fired Department include wage bill for the staff and the funds set aside for the maintenance of the various machines that the organization operates.

Many organizations are expected to perform efficiently by ensuring that they keep their operating expenses at an all time low. The organizations can achieve this by cutting back on unnecessary expenses.

Capital expenses are those that an organization is expected to incur over a given period of time (Gruttadaro 1). Organizations like the Hamden Fire Department incur capital expenses due to the acquisitions of such assets as machinery and buildings.

The acquisition of such assets is crucial to the operations of the organization. It is noted that there is a difference between capital and current expenditure. However, Gruttadaro (1) is of the view that, at times, ambiguity prevails as far as the differences are concerned.

For instance, when the said fire department conducts repairs over an extended period of time, the undertakings are referred to as operating expenses. In the event that such repairs are carried out all at once, the same is referred to as operating expenses.

Sources of Revenue and Budgetary Allocations Aronson and Schwartz (23) are of the opinion that local authorities require a source of revenue so as to fund their operations. Such jurisdictions as cities and states are mandated by law to collect different forms of taxes.

The said taxes constitute the revenue upon which the particular jurisdiction relies to fund its operations. The state of Connecticut, for example, is mandated by law to collect revenue in form of taxes. In addition, the state receives a specified portion of revenue from the federal government.

The latter is meant to supplement the revenues that a state collects through taxes and other such sources.

A look at Connecticut’s State Revenue reveals some of the said sources of revenue. Personal income tax, sales and use tax, as well as corporation tax are some of the most significant sources of revenue as far as taxes are concerned.

Motor vehicle licenses and business registration licenses form the second tier of revenue sources. Transfers from the federal government form the third tier of source of revenue for the state. Such cities as Hamden have similar sources of revenue.

Shortcomings of the Budget Making Process In this paper, the author has established that a budget is a systematic mechanism through which an organization allocates its various resources for effective delivery of services. The resources in reference here range from the financial to the human investments in the city (Kemp 31).

The said resources are organized in such a way that during a given fiscal year, the operations of an organization like Hamden Fire Department run smoothly.

The budget prepared by Hamden Fire Department has various shortcomings. One of the shortcomings is the fact that the organization puts more emphasis on recurrent expenditure as opposed to allocating funds to such investments as radio communication.

The shortcoming stems from the fact that the drafters of the budget may have lacked the ‘foresight’ of the department in mind. Capital expenditures are usually the best way through which an organization can become sustainable.

In the case of Hamden Fire Department, there is not a single capital budget set aside for the purchase of modern firefighting equipment.

It is noted that changing trends in tackling fires require such organizations as Hamden Fire Department to upgrade and provide firefighters with new and modernized machinery.

The process of developing any given budget, as already indicated, ought to be all inclusive (Kemp 100). To achieve this, members of the public should be given a longer period of time to make their contributions towards the budget making process.

The input of the community members should be taken seriously by those drafting the budget. Local authority budgets are made for the benefit of the people who reside within the said localities. For that reason, the people ought to be given more time to contribute towards the making of the budget.

The drafters need to spur public participation through various strategies, including engaging in civic education. In addition, the department needs to set money aside to educate members of the public on matters to do with fire prevention.

Recommendations Several recommendations are made in this report to improve the budget making process. The benefits of these recommendations are not restricted to the Hamden Fire Department.

On the contrary, they apply to other similar organizations operating within Hamden City and beyond. The following recommendations are made:

Members of the public should be involved actively in the budget making process. The Hamden Fire Department should hold quarterly open days to identify the demand for emergency services in the city.

A budget requires the input of professionals. In the case of Hamden Fire Department, there is minimal input from fire and emergency experts, hence the minimal allocations towards education. The Fire Chief and the Mayor should consult with professionals in disaster management to get advise on the procurement of the necessary equipment. Such a process will reduce recurrent expenditure.

The Hamden Fire Department should open its operations for interrogation by the public and auditors to avoid mismanagement of funds.

To avoid wastage of funds, the Fire Chief should work with the Mayor to legislate on spending ceilings. The same will prevent the urge to increase expenditure unnecessarily.

Conclusion Budgets are more beneficial to the organization if they respect public-private partnerships and if they are properly audited.

For instance, if the mayor of Hamden City wants the budget to meet the objectives of the various departments in the city, there is a need to thoroughly vet the financial approximations before new ones are passed.

Audits will highlight several items like recurrent expenditure and how funds can be redistributed to other areas that deserve higher allocations.

In addition, local authorities need to have their budgets audited to avoid instances where money is misappropriated. Ultimately, a budget should ensure that the objectives of the organization are met.

Works Cited Aronson, Richard, and E. Schwartz. Management Policies in Local Government Finance. Washington DC: International City/County Management Association, 2013. Print.

Fulton, Jeff 2013, Operating vs. Capital Budgets. Web.

Gruttadaro, Daniel 2013, What is Capital Expense? Web.

Hamden Fire Department 2013, History. Web.

Hamden Fire Department 2013, Organization Chart. Web.

Hamden Economic and Community Development 2013, Hamden at a Glance. Web.

Kemp, Roger. The Municipal Budget Crunch: A Handbook of Professionals, North Carolina: McFarland, 2012. Print.

Kennon, Joshua 2013. Operating Expense on the Income Statement. Web.

[supanova_question]

Importance of Gifted Education Analytical Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Gifted education has helped educators to improve learning in their schools, especially among the gifted students. Students in regular classes have also benefited from gifted education. The success of gifted education is attributed to the use of modern teaching methods that have been developed in the last few years.

Some of the teaching methods used in gifted education programs include project work, providing meaningful choices for students, self-directed learning, literature-based reading, and problem-based curriculum. A well-prepared environment is essential for excellent performance among gifted students.

It is against this backdrop that Montessori education emphasizes the importance of preparing the learning environment. In this regard, a well-prepared learning environment should enable students to acquire knowledge by exploring and engaging in different learning experiences. This paper reviews the existing literature on gifted education.

Sternberg (1995, p. 18) examined the use of the triarchic approach to identify gifted children. This approach is essentially an assessment process that involves conducting nine multiple-choice subtests. These subtests include analytic-verbal, analytic-quantitative, analytic-figural, practical-verbal, practical-quantitative, practical-figural, creative-verbal, creative-quantitative and creative-figural.

In analytic-verbal test, students are required to identify a novel word in a text and to deduce its meaning from the given context. Analytic-quantitative test involves predicting the next figure that should be included in a series of numbers. A figural matrix is used to conduct the analytical-figural subtest.

In this case, the teacher eliminates the lower right entry of the matrix so that students can identify the entry that fits it from a variety of choices. In practical-verbal subtests, students are expected to find solutions to typical problems that adolescents encounter in their everyday lives. For example, the teacher can ask the students to give suggestions on how to help a person with substance abuse problem.

The practical-quantitative subtest involves finding solutions to math problems, which explain everyday life scenarios such as buying tickets for a ballgame. In practical-figural subtest, a map of a specific area such as an entertainment park enables teachers to test the students’ navigation skills. Teachers use analogies in conjunction with counterfactual premises to conduct the creative-verbal subtest (Sternberg, 1995, p. 18).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, the students are required to solve the analogies in the context of the presented counterfactual premises. In creative-quantitative subtest, the students are expected to use specific novel number operations to find solutions to different math problems.

Finally, the creative-figural test involves completing a novel series. A figural series with one or more transformations is first presented to the students. Thus, the pupils apply the rules of this series to a different figure in order to create a new series.

Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 3) examined the development of cognitive skills, as well as, the importance of recognizing and nurturing talents in gifted children. They assert that children who are living in poverty are less likely than their counterparts from affluent backgrounds to be identified as gifted. This is likely to happen when the definition of giftedness emphasizes precocious development.

Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 3) used different assessments to study the concept of school readiness. In their study, standardized readiness tests were used to identify gifted children. They also examined the fundamental aspects of learning, which include the importance of teachers’ beliefs and practices that are associated with giftedness, as well as, students’ achievements and potential in diverse groups.

According to Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 4), the teaching practices that are used in primary schools are often framed in terms of developmentally appropriate practices (DAP), as well as, their effectiveness in enhancing learning among gifted students and diverse populations of learners.

In a longitudinal study of early development of language and literacy skills among gifted children, Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 4), found that the mean age at which the children spoke the first meaningful word was 9.1 months. This result was obtained from a sample of 52 children whose IQs were equal to or greater than 160.

Children whose IQs exceeded 148 were able to speak in complete sentences at the age of 16 months. In a quantitative study of eleven gifted pre-school children, parents reported that their children spoke the first word when they were between 9 and 12 months old. Furthermore, the children were able to speak in complete sentences at the age of 18 months.

We will write a custom Essay on Importance of Gifted Education specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Acquisition of reading skills at an early age is one of the main characteristics of gifted children. Empirical studies indicate that gifted children are able to recognize a large number of familiar and unfamiliar printed words at the age of three years. At this age, precocious readers are able to decode and comprehend different levels of text.

Gifted children below the age of 2 years have a high interest in words, symbols, and complex stories. Additionally, most gifted children have the ability to read before joining school. Similar studies have shown that gifted children have advanced numeracy skills.

Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 6) also examined the emotional and social consequences that gifted children are likely to face if their talents are not recognized or are undervalued during their early school years. Their findings reveal that students begin to mask their abilities as soon as they join pre-school in order to be at par with their peers and to meet the expectations of their teachers.

For instance, children who normally read text-laden books at home can select picture books in the classroom in order to mask their reading skills. Similarly, they can mask their linguistic sophistication by developing different ‘codes’ of speaking in the classroom and at home. Gifted children are more sensitive to early messages than their attempts to express boredom or to identify different approaches to a problem.

Early school entrance or participation in differentiated programs in pre-school and primary classrooms is common among gifted children. Consequently, teachers must be able to develop responsive and challenging learning opportunities in order to nurture the talents of gifted students. The teachers should also help the students to develop positive attitudes towards learning.

According to Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 6), most gifted children fail to demonstrate language precocity in adulthood. Additionally, not all children who acquire language skills at an early age are able to sustain this gain over their peers through the school years. Even though early language development enhances giftedness, it is not a necessary precondition for gifted performance in mature students.

The association between precocious development and later gifted performance can be sullied by the effects of socio-economic status on children’s early development. Consequently, Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 8) assert that it is the responsibility of the adults who are working with the children to broaden the conceptions of giftedness.

They further assert that teachers and parents should address the academic and social needs of young children. In this regard, the focus should be on the development of language, reading and logical reasoning skills.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Importance of Gifted Education by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even though descriptions enhance our understanding of group needs, they can also diminish the salience of diversity in the profiles of giftedness. Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 9) describe gifted children as precocious readers, writers, and mathematicians whose appetite for schoolwork is insatiable.

The narrow academic achievement conceptions of giftedness are likely to ignore students whose talents lie outside the domain of analytical intelligence. Gifted children who are living in poverty often face several barriers that hinder their early development. Consequently, they are likely to be ignored by the skill-based definitions of giftedness.

According to Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 14) these definitions are also likely to exclude minority students with gifted potential in communities that are associated with a significant overlap between low socio-economic status and minority ethnic status. Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 14) identified the following best practices concerning the identification of giftedness:

Giftedness is multifaceted

Giftedness is manifested in multiple ways

Identification procedures are effective when data is collected over time

Program and identification procedures should include students from diverse backgrounds

collaborative models that incorporate the inputs from teachers, parents, specialist and students should be used

Consistency is critical in the identification process and the services delivered by the program

The role of teacher expectation in the examination of students’ ability is integral in the identification process. Less-educated primary school teachers often base their academic expectations on the non-cognitive factors such as behavior, dressing and speech patterns. Teachers’ judgments are also likely to be influenced when they compare giftedness with high academic achievement and compliant behavior.

This premise is not likely to favor students with emotional and behavioral difficulties. This is because “developmentally appropriate practices and gifted students’ learning go hand-in-hand”. Since development occurs in stages, educators can predict it using a child’s age. This assumption tends to be inconsistent with the developmental characteristics of most young children.

Thus, age-based approaches are not appropriate for assessing the suitability of teaching practices. In this regard, Brighton, Moon, Jarvis and Hockett (2007, p. 19) recommend the use of Vygotsky’s zone of proximal development as an alternative model of cognitive progress.

In this model, students develop by practicing skills and finding solutions to problems that they are able to complete through cognitive scaffolding in order to attain independent mastery. Within this framework, instructions are tailored to meet the students’ actual, rather than expected developmental capabilities. Thus, the teacher has to differentiate the curriculum in order to meet the needs of all students.

Cooperative learning refers to “a set of instructional strategies which employs small teams of pupils to promote peer interaction and cooperation for studying academic subjects”. Students must collaborate in order to attain a common objective in the learning process. According to Robinson (1991, p. 15), cooperative learning has positive effects in cross-ethnic relationships.

Despite its importance in the study of cooperative learning, Robinson’s research had definitional and sampling problems. Concisely, most of her findings were not obtained in the context of gifted or high ability students. In some cases, there was inadequate information about the students’ past achievements. Tests were used to identify high ability students.

These tests were administered by the teachers. For example, students who were able to score more than the median mark in math test were considered to have high ability. High ability as defined by “single achievement measures of basic skills, teacher constructed placement tests, or teacher judgment should not be used interchangeably with giftedness”.

According to Robinson (1991, p. 17), the success of group work depends on the availability of a student who understands the material that is being studied and is able to explain it to others. Even though the students who explain the learning materials to others enhance their understanding through this experience, too much repetition of the explanations can cause constant reviews.

Teachers must organize cooperative learning groups in a manner that reduces the ‘free rider’ effect. Consequently, the responsibility of explaining the learning materials or giving instructions will be shared among the group members. Talented students consider disproportionate sharing of responsibilities, and the failure of team members to contribute in heterogeneous groups to be unfair and frustrating.

In this regard, the following recommendations should be considered in order to facilitate cooperative learning. First, schools should not introduce cooperative learning as an alternative for the dedicated programs, which benefit the gifted students in a diverse class. Second, schools that are devoted to cooperative learning must use approaches that enable gifted students to access advanced learning materials.

Students Teams Achievement Division (STAD) and Jigsaw limit the ability of gifted students to access advanced curriculum since they depend on prepared grade-level materials. Finally, schools that are committed to cooperative learning should use models that are flexible.

Westberg and Archambault (1995, p. 2) examined the strategies that are used by teachers to differentiate instructions for high ability students. Differentiation refers to the approaches that educators employ to accommodate students’ academic differences by determining what students will learn, how they will learn it, and how they will demonstrate it.

The findings of this study indicated that most teachers were aware of the students’ academic differences. The teachers considered their students to be individuals with different skills, interests, styles, and talents. Moreover, they were aware of the students’ strengths and weaknesses.

According to Sternberg, Grigorenko and Ferrari (2004, p. 2), measuring intelligence and success require expertise. It requires “meta-components of thinking, which include recognition of problems, definition of problems, formulation of strategies, representation of information, allocation of resources, as well as, monitoring and evaluation of solutions to various problems”.

In this regard, Sternberg, Grigorenko and Ferrari (2004, p. 2) attribute the development of these skills to gene-environment, co-variation, and interaction. Conventional tests of intelligence and related abilities measure past achievements. These tests include vocabulary, oral analogies, conceptual reasoning, and solving mathematical problems.

The problem that is associated with the conventional model is that it proposes a causal relationship in which the tests reflect a construct that seems to be a causal of, rather than a mere temporary antecedent of later success. Most human characteristics reveal the co-variation and the association between genetic and contextual factors.

However, conducting an explicit measure of the influence of genes on the development of intelligence is not possible. Consequently, we can only measure a portion of the expressed intelligence. This includes the expressions of developing expertise, as well as, the type of expertise that can possibly facilitate reflection among practitioners. In this regard, there should be a relationship between intelligence measures and later success.

The facets of intelligence include analytical, creative, and practical domain. The attainment of expertise in a given creative domain or in a particular practical domain is associated with the achievement of expertise in similar domains. Psychometric research suggests “more domain generality for the analytical domain” (Sternberg, Grigorenko,

[supanova_question]

Gender Politics in Early Modern Russia Exploratory Essay essay help site:edu

Introduction Much has been written about Europe’s political past, however a reader would be surprised to note that there is little literature coverage of women’s political roles during the period. This situation can be attributed to the cultures of this period.

During this time, women were used to being ignored in political roles. Women never held any office, sat in political meetings, nor served as judges. They were reduced to serving as sextons, house cleaners, and churchwardens.

By the start of the early modern Europe, estimated to be early 1500s, Russia was remarkably diverse with respect to its communal and cultural patterns. However, it was not until the 18th century that the country experienced heady models of gender relations.

Notably, the country did not enjoy the economic prosperity enjoyed by other neighbouring countries like Poland during the early modern times. As such, gender politics in early modern Russia were less diverse compared with that of Poland (Clements 2012, P.12).

In the 16th and 17th centuries, gender relations in Russia were influenced by the communal and financial strategies of the Muscovite state. This paper focuses on gender politics in early modern Russia.

Early 16th century Muscovite politics dominated much of the early modern Russia. During this time, honour and leadership was centred on male authority. Men who protected the chastity and reputations of their women were honoured in the society.

The most powerful politicians in this regime were referred to as boyars (Kollmann 1987, p.1). A number of these politicians constituted a council of advisors. They were supposed to administer justice, led military campaigns, represented the state in foreign matters, and advised Tsar.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These positions were filled with men from different clans. It should be noted that during the start 16th century women were exempted from political positions. Even the privileged and royal women did not enjoy political opportunities as the Polish women did.

Despite this, some historians such as Isolde Thyrêt assert that 16th century Russian women were an important facet of Muscovite politics. Thyrêt substantiates her claims using the stories about Tsar Aleksei Mikhailovich, his wife, and sisters.

Through this, she illustrates that women were required to pray for the leaders, give advice to the leaders, and act as their leaders’ mediators.

Although the Old Belief and the Church were quiet about the political roles played by women in the early modern Russia, there were female leaders who became very influential and achieved a lot compared to their male counterparts from 17th century onwards.

How influential were the women in the 17th century Russia? In the 17th century, influential women in Muscovite emerged. These women included Boyarina Feodosii Morozova, Elena Khrushchev, Evpraksiia Nashchokin, and Evdokiia Petrovna Naryshki. Both females and males valued these women.

A majority of them had thousands of male servants who respected and obeyed them. It is alleged that male leaders respected them because of their influence on the convents. These women did not only come from the Muscovite boyar clans, but also from varied social classes.

According to these historians, the most influential female leader in Muscovite history was Morozova. This woman is renowned because she was the only woman in the 17th century who became the subject of an old believer referred to as Vita (Michels 1995, p. 431).

We will write a custom Essay on Gender Politics in Early Modern Russia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Morozova used to communicate with another leader known as Avvakum through letters. In the letters, the woman appears to be larger than life saint with great religious conviction. These letters indicate that Morozova used to live in a palace in Moscow.

In the year 1662, when her husband died, the woman inherited one of the largest properties in the state. Through this property, she received control over a large territory with thousands of servants.

Unlike other widows who were defeated to manage their husbands’ properties, Morozova managed her property with exceptional leadership skills.

For instance, she ordered the parish priest to apprehend parishioners failing to attend church services. Those who went against her directives, were held, questioned, and disciplined.

In years to come, she maintained her power over her husband’s vast lands despite some efforts by a few individuals who tried to strip her of the property. Between the years 1666 and 1667, a number of church officials who had been exiled by other believers found refuge in the woman’s palace.

In the palace, the woman informed the refugees that she was their sole leader and one word from her could destroy their lives.

After the death of Morozova’s son, her life took a dramatic change. She gave up on earthly things and dedicated her life to the church. She later prayed and fasted for the rest of her life.

Another influential female leader in the history of the Russian Old Belief was Elena Khrushchev. The woman belonged to unpopular boyar clan. Despites the clan’s unpopularity in politics, the men from the clan were renowned for their cruelty towards their women.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Gender Politics in Early Modern Russia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Khrushchev managed to be a nun after divorcing her clan. Thereafter, she became one of the most dreaded and respected woman in the early modern Russia. The woman was very determined and had desired leadership skills.

Under the reign of Patriarch Nikon, the woman was chosen as a manager of rituals in Vosnesenskii monastery. By mid 1660, the woman had become very powerful. During the year 1664, she planned the removal of Nikon from the throne.

In the subsequent years, the woman got into more troubles. Soon after becoming Nikon’s enemy, she got into a disagreement with the abbess of her convent. Khrushchev argued that the abbess was illiterate and that he was not fit for being a leader.

Later, the abbess proved her wrong when she provided evidence before tsar that he was literate. Because of her ill motives, Khrushchev was later fired and her position replaced by a male official. After losing her position, the woman was forced into exile in Kaluga.

Other religious women leaders who became very popular and influential in the early modern Russia include Evpraksiia Nashchokin and Evdokiia Petrovna Naryshki.

As a substitute of admitting isolation, the above women decided to venture into the male dominated fields and became important personalities.

Without a doubt, most of them were so influential that whole convents and their servants abided by their religious teachings. As indicated above, others saved some religious rebels from being persecuted by hosting them as refugees.

These women have inspired several feminists across Europe. Their power and influence continues to amaze historians because they triumphed in an male dominated era.

In the late 17th century, Muscovites economic, social, and political policies began to change. These changes were attributed to the rise of Italian Renaissance virtues (Meade

[supanova_question]

NBA: Competing on Global Delivery with Akamai OS Streaming Case Study cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Using Porter’s competitive forces model, analyse the NBA’s market situation. How does the use of Akamai help the NBA compete in this market?

To analyse the NBA’s market situation, it is necessary to refer to Porter’s competitive forces model and to examine the position in relation to such criteria as the industry rivalry, buyer power, suppliers’ power, threat of substitutes, and threat of mobility.

Referring to the industry rivalry force, the National Basketball Association should state its position within the industry and compete with the other North American sports leagues such as the Major League Baseball, the National Hockey League, and the National Football League along with a range of the other professional leagues around the world.

According to the criterion of the buyer power, the NBA depends on the audience’s interest in the league’s activities and provide media content.

The influence of the suppliers’ power on the NBA is rather low. The NBA is not dependent on the potential substitutes because of the tremendous competitive advantage. Focusing on the threat of mobility, it is possible to state that it is rather low, but any problems with the access to the NBA media content because of the website’s drawbacks can lead to decreasing the number of the potential audience.

Thus, the use of Akamai helps the NBA compete within this market because the company’s services are used to guarantee the provision of the high-quality content around the globe of regardless the location of the user.

That is why the high-quality content reaches the global audience easily, contributing to the NBA competitive advantage. The necessary NBA content can be accessed by users more comfortable and quicker in comparison with using the services operated by the other leagues because Akamai relies on multiple distribution channels.

Using Porter’s generic strategies model, what do you think is the NBA’s overall strategy or strategies?

Following Porter’s generic strategies model, it is possible to state that the NBA’s overall strategy is the differentiation strategy. Having analysed the target scope, it is essential to note that the NBA is oriented to broadcast the important information about the league as well as all the associated media content widely, focusing on the global audience.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The NBA avoids possible differences in relation to the audience’s access to the media content and uses the Akamai services in order to add to the leading company’s strategies according to which the advertising and promotion are realised in all the regions globally, and the company’s success depends on the effective self-provision.

Furthermore, the chosen advantage is the product uniqueness that is why the Akamai services are discussed as efficient to contribute to the aspect of the product uniqueness.

Why is it important that all fans in the world have the same experience?

Following the NBA mission and goals, it is necessary to state that all the fans around the globe should have the same experience while sharing the NBA media content. This fact is important because the league orients to the global audience, and it is important to avoid and overcome any discrimination associated with the possibilities of users from different countries to access the video, games, or interviews broadcasted widely.

The NBA works to increase the number of the target audience globally; that is why it is significant to provide the media content to all the world regions in order to give the users equal opportunities. As a result, to increase traffic levels and visits to the NBA’s website, it is necessary to use the Akamai efficient services dependent on the developed technologies.

Why is it important that individual franchise owners can build, manage, and distribute on the NBA platform their content?

The services provided by Akamai enable the individual franchise owners to manage and distribute their content on the NBA platform more actively and efficiently, contributing to the increased competitive advantage and owners’ potential. The NBA provides the individual franchise owners to distribute the independent content in order to strengthen them and to attract more people as the target audience.

Thus, the business model, which is used by the NBA and improved with references to the use of the Akamai services is useful to provide more advantages for the individual franchise owners to develop their activities.

The individual franchise owners rely on the developed business strategies and the promotion of the business activities with the help of the NBA platform and the Akamai services can be discussed as the necessary condition to speak about the overall success of the NBA as the leading league within the industry.

We will write a custom Case Study on NBA: Competing on Global Delivery with Akamai OS Streaming specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The word ‘partnership’ appears several times in the video. Who are the NBA’s partners? How does the concept of a strategic ecosystem apply to the NBA’s partnership strategies?

The increased competitive advantage of the NBA directly depends on the league’s effective partnership with the Akamai computing platform and server to distribute different types of content globally. From this point, Akamai is one of the NBA’s partners.

The advantages of such partnership are in providing the NBA with the opportunities to respond to the increased demand for the league’s media content and to provide the high-speed and high-quality channels for the users worldwide to receive the access to the necessary material without references to the region, but depending on Akamai servers located globally.

The other NBA’s partners are the companies and suppliers which support the NBA’s activities, advertising, and promotion. In this case, the NBA can build the effective partnership relations with suppliers and distributors to support the worldwide spreading of the NBA’s media content and with different companies which operate in the sphere of the technological support as Akamai does.

As a result, while developing the effective and developed partnership relations with different companies operating in various associated industries, the NBA creates the specific strategic ecosystem which is successful to contribute to the progress of all the companies working within the ecosystem.

From this point, referring to the example of the relations with Akamai, it is possible to note that the NBA relies on the developed strategic ecosystem as the source of the necessary support. For instance, the Akamai services guarantee the effective management of a variety of media assets. The distribution of the content is equally efficient in different countries around the globe.

That is why the NBA intends to develop the partnership relations with Akamai in order to contribute to the NBA website’s development and to the further attraction of the global audience. The Akamai services are efficient, reliable, and based on innovative technologies. That is why, such relations with the Akamai services can be discussed as advantageous for the NBA.

[supanova_question]

The Humankind and Its Laws through the Eyes of a Child Critical Essay argumentative essay help

There is hardly anything more difficult for a child than trying to adjust to the specifics of an adult world. Ruled by what seems from a child’s perspective shockingly insane principles, the universe of the grown-up people is far too absurd to embrace and far too exciting to stay away from.

Touching upon the problem of children trying to comply with the rules set by adults and for adults, as well as addressing the problem of growing pains, Mun-Yol Yi in his Our Twisted Hero, as well as Mo Yan in his Pow!, considers the chances of a child to survive in the world of adults.

Although the two authors create completely different universes, with colorful and unique characters and different plotlines, there is still a tangible similarity in which children portray adult world and consider moral and ethical dilemmas that they encounter on their way.

Whenever both authors start taking about the childhood experiences of their characters, they would always mention the obstacles that these characters were forced to fight in order to become a part of the adult society.

In many cases, the lead characters will have to face injustice; interpreting it as a part of growing up, the authors make their leads accept the fact that they will have to fight their way to the top.

Another peculiar issue regarding the lessons that both leading characters learn about the adult world concerns morality in the community.

As the reader sees the adult world through the lens of a small child, all the threats of this new and potentially dangerous environment come out in full blue, literally making the reader shudder.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, by far the most cringe inducing element of the adult world reality appears to be the lack of justice, which the leading characters in both novels often become witnesses for and even victims of: “Suddenly, my nose began to sting and tears rolled around my eyes. It wasn’t completely clear to me then, but I suppose I was tasting the sorrow of the ostracized, the bitter loneliness that goes with alienation”1.

Among the most graphic examples of Han facing injustice, the moment at which he realizes that he actually has enemies, whom he did nothing to and who are nevertheless hate him, Eom being one of those people.

Even though in the end, the two characters finally reconcile, it is still clear that the thought of having a person who nurtures hatred against him comes as a huge and unpleasant revelation to Han.

While in Our Twisted Hero, the ethical issues seem rather obvious, in Pow!, the conflict between the moral code of the protagonist and the principles and values that the society is trying to foist on him, is described in a much more subtle manner.

By creating a realm of hallucinatory realism, Mo Yan blurs the line between dreams and reality, therefore, questioning the very essence of being.

Thus, the ethical issues come as more subtle, yet nonetheless demanding answers. Mo Yan poses such questions as where the line between the socially acceptable and the socially inacceptable must be drawn.

Of all the details that prevent the readers to relate the characters from one book to the characters from another one, the difference in pacing should be mentioned first.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Humankind and Its Laws through the Eyes of a Child specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is remarkable that Yi immediately sets the stage for the young character to explore the world and cognize reality; even though the idea of starting a novel in a flashback does seem a little weird, the payoff, which the readers experience as they watch the reader’s universe collide with the harsh adult reality, is well worth the risks that the author takes with his well-trodden approach.

Yan, on the contrary, decides to set his novel in the realm of the present-day world, and reveals the fact that his protagonist is mostly going to be shown as a child throughout the entire novel only a while after the readers start relate to the Monk, Yan’s lead character.

While the given differences do not affect the way in which the readers relate to the protagonist, it does change the audience’s vision of the leads as children.

Yan’s Monk is capable of evaluating the childhood experience of his vis-a-vis in a calm and reserved manner, which reduces the shock value for the reader as the latter finds out about the negligence that the leading character experienced in his relationships with his father: “He had forgotten I ever existed”2.

Yi, on the contrary, throws the reader into the realm of a little kid, the realm, which is about to collide with the world of adults and suffer severe damage in the process.

At the end of the day, the lessons that the audience learns from both novels, are quite obvious.

However, these lessons have still been introduced in a very clever way; both authors could have simply gone into creating a dram displaying the faults of society as they are seen through the eyes of children.

Instead, both authors manage to provide a rather fair account of the rights and wrongs of the society, with the adult versions of their leading characters summarizing the key points that both authors make.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Humankind and Its Laws through the Eyes of a Child by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Han defeating Eom at the end of Our Twisted Hero serves as a cautionary tale about being irresponsible about one’s power, while the ending of the Pow! seems quite random, much like the novel itself.

As for the Pow!, its lessons seem to have stuck in the thicket of magical realism, and the ending of the novel literally dissolves in the final chapter.

Regardless of the complexity of the plot, however, Pow! Still offers an important lesson to consider – it shows the perils of escapism, which children usually resort to when bumping into the harshness of the real world.

While in Pow!, the lesson might be too on the nose, it is still admirable that the author spends so much time on making his character three-dimensional, and his childhood experience relatable for the readers.

Though the universes created in each of the novels differ strikingly from each other in terms of the time, setting, characters and plot, they still have the same conflict of children facing the disturbingly unpleasant reality of the adult world.

Both novels shed the light on how lonely it is to be a child, and what effort it takes to come out of one’s shell in order to explore the world and only get disappointed in the process.

Showing that children actually need parental guidance in order to cognize the world around them and be able to retain their optimistic attitude without turning into cynics, both authors make it clear that for a child thrown into the adult world and left completely on his or her own, life becomes a fight for survival.

Very few people come out of this fight safe; for the most part, the lessons learned in the process leave the battle scars that will not go away any time soon.

Bibliography Yan, Mo. Pow! New York, NY: Seagull Publications. 2012.

Yi, Mun-Yol. Our Twisted Hero. New York City, NY: Hyperion East. 2001.

Footnotes Mun-Yol Yi, Our Twisted Hero, (New York City, NY: Hyperion East. 2001), 511..

Mo Yan, Pow!, (New York, NY: Seagull Publications. 2012), 17.

[supanova_question]